JP2017209218A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring a structure.SOLUTION: A game board includes: a plurality of structures including a first structure; a plurality of light emitting means including first light emitting means and second light emitting means; and first drive means capable of performing drive. The first light emitting means is movable by the drive of the first drive means. The second light emitting means is not moved by the drive of the first drive means. The first structure can transmit light from the first light emitting means and light from the second light emitting means. One of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can emit light at a front side of the first structure.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 195

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, a game table provided with a structure has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in the structure.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a structure.

  A gaming table according to the present invention is a gaming table including a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a drivable first driving means, and one of the plurality of light emitting means ( Hereinafter, the “first light emitting means” is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter “second light emitting means”). Is a means which does not move by the driving of the first driving means, and one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”) is the first. A structure that can transmit light from one light-emitting means, and the first structure is a structure that can transmit light from the second light-emitting means, and the first light-emitting means and the structure Any one of the second light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light on the front side of the first structure, A gaming table characterized the door.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic structure.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the state which attached the back surface cover from the back surface (back surface). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the state which removed the back surface cover from the back surface (back surface). (A) It is the schematic front view which extracted and showed the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246. (B) It is side sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (a). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of a general drawing start port (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. It is the outline rear view which looked at the rear unit 200a from the back side in the state where the accessory unit 950 was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the rear unit 200a in the state which removed the accessory unit 950 from the back side. It is the elements on larger scale which expand and show the game ball storage part periphery. It is a disassembled perspective view of the accessory unit 950. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is the schematic front view which showed the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b, and the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rising accessory unit 750. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a launching accessory unit 800. FIG. It is an expansion perspective view of the relay board | substrate 806 with which the launching accessory unit 800 is provided. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a V forming accessory unit 850. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the right light-guide plate 854h of V formation actor right unit 854 from the back side. FIG. It is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the drop expansion combination 712. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 in the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700 of the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700, and showed the rotation operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 in a state where they are installed on the game board 200. (A) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position. (B) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is operating. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V forming accessory unit 850; It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the V formation combination unit 850 in the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. (A) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 730 which are located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 730 which are located in the 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 730 which are located in the 3rd operation position. It is the figure which showed the initial operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 730 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the notice by the light emission of the light emission means in time series. It is the figure which showed the production etc. in special figure 1 variable game. It is the figure which showed the production etc. in special figure 1 variable game. It is the figure which showed the production etc. in special figure 1 variable game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example which overlaps the display area of a display means with a movable body. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example which overlaps (hides) a movable body with another movable body. (A) It is the figure which showed the example in which the fall expansion | deployment combination 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735 which has the opening part 735a. (B) It is the figure which showed the example by which the fall expansion | deployment combination 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736 which has the notch part 736a. (C) It is the figure which showed the example by which the fall expansion | deployment combination 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the center combination 900. FIG. (A) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 760 which are located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 760 which are located in the 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment combination 760 which are located in the 3rd operation position. (A) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment character 770 which are located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of the fall deployment character 770 which are located in the 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of fall expansion | deployment combination 770 which are located in the 3rd operation position. It is the figure which showed the operation examples 1-3 of the accessory 820 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation examples 1 and 2 of the accessory 830 in time series. It is the figure which showed the basic concept of this invention. It is the figure which showed the basic concept of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 68 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the other case following FIG.69 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 73 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 74 in steps. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 75 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 76 in stages. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in steps. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 87 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 88 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 100 in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 116 in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which entangled the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example regarding the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 141 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through a weak SP reach effect, and it makes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 143 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG.143 and FIG.144. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where it loses | hangs out while performing the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) through strong SP reach production. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 146. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed through a strong SP reach effect, and becomes a big hit. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 148 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example in which the chance button 136 which is the operation means A starts a vibration according to operation of the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in a step. It is a figure which shows an example which operated the chance button 136 which is the operation means A after operating the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in the step. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 151. It is a figure which shows the example which the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates when a housing | casing vibrates. It is a figure which shows the example which permeable part 191 itself rotates in the front-back direction, and vibrates strongly. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the scene where the enemy character wins is displayed once through a strong SP reach production, but becomes a big hit by a revival production. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 155 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the notice effect produced in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the pseudo | simulation ream in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the other effect which entangled the pseudo-ream in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shake variation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 163 in stages. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th effect and a 5th effect in steps. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example in a case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 166. It is a figure for further explaining the relation between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of the promotion effect. It is the figure which showed two other examples regarding a promotion effect. It is a figure for demonstrating general timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which may display the timer warning display T according to button operation in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the timing of back button operation, and the timing of a holding | maintenance increase. It is a figure which shows two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the method of the display including the timer announcement display T. FIG. It is a figure showing an example in case a timer notice overlaps with other effects accompanied by countdown of remaining time. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which the timer announcement display T is displayed on the device different from the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mode of the change display of the decoration symbol in which the animation of a holding | maintenance icon is performed in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in a design stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of a hold increase during a symbol stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of two hold increasing during a pattern fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case the holding | maintenance increases two while the symbol stops. It is a figure for demonstrating winning order fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case a holding | maintenance increases in winning order fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows an example when a hold | maintenance increases during a stop display in a winning order fluctuation | variation, and it becomes a hold full tank. It is a figure which shows the example by which a simultaneous change effect is not performed depending on the type of the hold icon currently displayed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change production when it becomes a reserve full tank in winning order change. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the figure which showed typically the structure which concerns on Example 1, and the light emission means. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-1. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-2. (C) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-3. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-4. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-5. (C) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 2-6. It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 3-1. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 4-1. (B-1)-(b-2) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 4-2. It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 5-1. It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 6. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 7-1. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the structure and light emission means which concern on Example 7-2. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the example further provided with the panel in the structure and the light emission means. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the example further provided with the movable body in the structure and the light emission means. It is the figure which showed the other example of the structure. It is the figure which showed the other example of the light emission means.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 17) are disposed around the decorative symbol display device 208. Details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to display various effects and various game information. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, a stage 244 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in an area where the game ball can roll. The stage 244 can temporarily roll a game ball or the like outside the game area 124. Further, a wall 200a3 described later is erected on the rear side of the stage 244, and a game ball that rolls on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall 200a3, and the front side. Guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The general map display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general map, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. A first special figure display device 212 and a second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The not-shown universal chart hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending custom figure variable games (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the normal figure variable game has a predetermined number (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to 2). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure variation game. The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a probabilistic state to a high probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged on the right side of the view. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 as viewed from the front in this embodiment. The first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 include a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. When the display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is raised as a winning ball. Drain to dish 126. Note that the balls that have entered the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc. The variable prize opening 235) or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232) is won, or any prize opening or start opening is not won, or the ordinary start opening 228 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 with the back cover attached as seen from the back (back), and FIG. 4 shows the gaming board 200 with the back cover removed from the back (back). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a back cover 241 made of a transparent plate member is disposed on the back of the game board 200. The back cover 241 is rotatably mounted on the game board 200 via hinges 242 provided at two places on the left side when viewed from the back. In addition, lock portions 243 for fixing the back cover 241 to the back surface of the game board 200 are arranged at two positions on the top and bottom of the back cover 241 opposite to the hinge portion 242.

  A main control board case 244 that can accommodate a control board (hereinafter also referred to as a main control board or a main control board) that constitutes a main control unit 300 described later is disposed below the back cover 241. As shown in FIG. 4, a control board (hereinafter referred to as a sub-control board or a sub-control board) that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 described later is located above the main control board case 244 and at a position covered by the back cover 241. A sub control board case 245 that can accommodate a control board), and a liquid crystal control board case 246 that can accommodate a control board (hereinafter also referred to as a liquid crystal control board) constituting a second sub control unit 500 described later. It is arranged.

  The sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered with the back cover 241. However, since the back cover 241 of this example is a transparent plate member, the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered. In addition, the state of various electronic components and the like housed in the board cases 245 and 246 can be visually recognized from the back surface (back surface) side through the back surface cover 241.

  FIG. 5A is a front view schematically showing the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246, and FIG. 5B is a side along the line AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  The liquid crystal control board case 246 accommodates the above-described liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a and another control board. The sub control board case 245 accommodates the above-described sub control board 245a.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when the right side surface of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as a reference plane, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board are arranged in order from the reference plane. 245a and the relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference plane than the liquid crystal control board 246a, and is arranged at a position closer to the reference plane than the relay board 246b. It is located between 246a and the relay substrate 246b.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, The display control of the drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common figure display device 210 is performed. Drive control 326 and various state display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) are controlled. And a driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208 Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and detection signals from the various sensors 424 as basic circuits. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting to 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542; The game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication. In this example, the accessory unit 950 is driven and controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. However, the driving unit 950 is configured to be driven and controlled by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). Also good.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 7A to 7C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.7 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do.

  These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display.

  As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 7B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 2C shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal).

  When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232. It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed.

  In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226, 234, 235 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 7C) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 7C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag.

  Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 7A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid for driving to open / close the door member of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 (until a game ball with a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234). 332), a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the first variable prize winning opening 234 or the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member of the second variable prize winning opening 235, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, , Whether or not there is a winning in the second variable winning opening 235.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, or the second variable winning port 235, or via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the accessory unit 950, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Director>
Next, the rendering device provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 of this example is a rear unit 200a in which the effect device is disposed, a front unit 200c that forms the above-described game area 124, and a plate-like member that partitions the rear unit 200a and the front unit 200c. It consists of three units of plate 200b. Then, the game board 200b is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 200a, and the front unit 200c is further attached to the front surface of the game board 200b, so that the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are three units. Constitute a game board 200 together. In addition, the material of the game board 200b is not specifically limited, Transparent resin may be sufficient and it may be wooden.

  On the right side of the game board 200b as viewed from the front, a gate through hole 200b1 formed of a long hole through which a part of a general-purpose start opening (gate) 228 disposed in the front unit 200c can penetrate, and the gate through hole 200b1 A notch 200b2 is formed as a mark for specifying the position of. Further, on the right side of the rear unit 200a as viewed from the front, there is formed a gate notch 200a1 that can touch (access) a part of a general opening (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c. Has been.

  FIGS. 13A and 13B are partially enlarged views showing the vicinity of the universal drawing start (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. In a state where the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are integrated, the rear end portion of the normal start port (gate) 228 disposed in the front unit 200c is connected to the game board 200b. It is configured to pass through the gate through hole 200b1 and reach the inner space of the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a.

  A store clerk or the like of the game store can easily and quickly specify the location of the usual start opening (gate) 228 by using the notch 200b2 of the game board 200b as a mark, and configures the game board 200. Without disassembling the unit, it is possible to replace the normal start port (gate) 228 or visually check the general start port (gate) 228 through the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a. it can. For this reason, maintenance work such as replacement and repair of the general-purpose start opening (gate) 228 becomes easier than before, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any illegal act on the general-purpose start opening (gate) 228. There are cases where it can be prevented.

<Game Ball Storage Department>
Next, the game ball storage section provided in the rear unit 200a will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed, as viewed from the rear side. FIG. 15 shows the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed in the rear side. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of the game ball storage unit in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a rear unit opening 200a2 is formed in the center of the rear unit 200a so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit 200a can be visually recognized. . Further, above the rear unit opening 200a2, a center accessory 900 is disposed in the horizontal direction of the rear unit 200a, and at the center thereof, a center accessory opening 900a shaped like the outline of the character's face is formed. ing. Although the details will be described later, the face of the character applied to the cover means 718 of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 disposed behind the center accessory 900 is visible from the center accessory opening 900a.

  Below the rear unit opening portion 200a2, a wall portion 200a3 made of a transparent plate-like member and a decorative portion 200a4 shaped in an uneven shape are disposed. Further, below the decoration portion 200a4, a horizontally long dish-shaped game ball storage portion 200a5 is arranged from the vicinity of the left end of the rear unit opening 200a2 in the rear view to the vicinity of the right end. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball storage unit 200a5 is a part capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB1.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 16, the game ball storage unit 200a5 of the present example is a second storage unit 200a8 having a width capable of storing a maximum of two game balls in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. A first reservoir 200a7 that communicates with the second reservoir 200a8 and has a width capable of accommodating a maximum of one game ball in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a, and a second reservoir And a guide part 200a6 having an inclined surface inclined downward toward 200a8. Since the guide part 200a6 has an inclined surface, it is possible to guide the game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a over the wall part 200a3 and the like to the second storage part 200a8.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, below this game ball storage section 200a5, a plurality of connectors 200a9 to which harnesses for electrically connecting the accessory unit 950 and the rear unit 200a can be attached, A plurality of game ball passages 200a11 are provided for guiding game balls that are out of the region 124 to a lower plate or the like. The game ball storage part 200a5 of this example also functions as a part for preventing a game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a from over the wall part 200a3 from coming into contact with the connector 200a9.

  By providing such a game ball storage unit 200a5, it is possible to prevent a situation such as a short circuit of the electrical system or damage to the connector 200a9 due to the game ball coming into contact with the connector 200a9, and stable game control is possible. There are cases where it can be done.

  Further, in this example, a gap having a width equal to or more than one game ball is formed between the wall portion 200a3 and the decorative portion 200a4. As shown in FIG. It functions as a second game ball storage unit 200a10 that can temporarily store the game ball EB2 that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a.

<Household unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

  The accessory unit 950 is a unit that is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 200a. In this example, the dropped and unfolded accessory unit 700, the ascending accessory unit 750, the launching accessory unit 800, and the V forming accessory unit 850 are used. Consists of. In this example, the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Functional unit / Fall-deployed functional unit>
18 to 20 are exploded perspective views of the falling and unfolding accessory unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700 mainly includes a U-shaped base 702 in front view, and a pair of left upper and lower drive units disposed on the left side and the front right side of the base 702. 704, a right up / down drive unit 706, a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, a relay substrate 710 for electrically connecting the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700 and another substrate, and a pair And a left and right driving unit 704 and a right vertical driving unit 706, and a falling and unfolding accessory 712 (see FIG. 20) that can slide in the vertical direction.

<Corporate unit / Falling unit / Left (right) vertical drive>
As shown in FIG. 18, the left vertical drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to the upper portion of the drive base 704a, and the drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the left vertical drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and is slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702. The left vertical drive unit 704 is fixed to the slider 704 e and is dropped and expanded. Of the left rotation motor base 712e1 and a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is arranged to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d. And is configured to slide up and down. The right up / down driving unit 706 has the same structure as the left up / down driving unit 704, as shown in FIGS.

  A falling and unfolding combination 712, which will be described later, is supported at both ends by a combination support section 704f of the left vertical drive section 704 and a combination support section 706f of the right vertical drive section 706, and the left drive motor 704b and the right drive are supported. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the dropping and developing agent 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as “up and down operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.

<Corporate unit / drop deploying unit / unlocking unit>
As shown in FIG. 18, the unlocking portion 708 is engaged with a solenoid 708a driven by a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 6, a shaft portion 708b slid longitudinally by the solenoid 708a, and the shaft portion 708b. The movable portion 708c that is slid in the vertical direction together with the shaft portion 708b, the rotating portion 708d that is rotated in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and the direction indicated by the symbol A by the rotating portion 708d. And a slidable claw portion 708e.

  The claw portion 708e of the unlocking portion 708 is slidably disposed inside and outside a through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is actuated to cause the claw portion 708e to enter the through hole 702a, the base 702 is prevented from sliding downward (locked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is actuated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the downward sliding of the base 702 is allowed (unlocked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight. To do. In addition, in the above-described “up and down movement of the falling and unfolding combination 712”, in addition to the downward sliding due to the operation of the left driving motor 704b and the right driving motor 706b, the downward sliding due to the weight of the falling unfolding combination 712 is also performed. included.

<Corporate unit / Fall unfolding accessory unit / Fall unfolding accessory>
As shown in FIG. 20, the drop-deployed accessory 712 includes a long plate-like fourth structure 712a supported at both ends by the accessory support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 19, and the fourth structure 712a. A first plate-like first structure 712b that is rotatably attached to the front side of the first structure, a pair of left and right third structures 712c that are rotatably arranged on the fourth structure 712a, A pair of left and right second structures 712d rotatably disposed on the structure 712b, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotating the left side of the first structure 712b in front view, A right rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b when viewed from the front, and plate-like cover means 718 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the front side of the first structure 712b. Configured.

  The left rotation drive unit 712e decorates the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support unit 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. Left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3, a gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b in front view. Rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has substantially the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, as shown in FIG. 20, but includes a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51 on the rotation arm 712f5 and the position of the detection piece 712f51. The point provided with the sensor 712f6 which can be detected is different from the left rotation drive part 712e. The right rotation drive unit 712f includes the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, thereby detecting whether or not the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 30A). Is possible.

  In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2, the rotation arm 712e5 is rotated via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is the front side. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 is rotated via the gear 712f4, and the right side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed is rotated (inclined) to the front side. ) Is configured to.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, the first structure 712b can be rotated (tilted) to the front side (direction away from the fourth structure 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (inclining) the first structure 712b of the dropping and developing agent 712 to the front side may be referred to as “the rotating operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.

  A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base portion 712g. Is done. On the other hand, an engagement portion 712m that can engage with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structure 712b is returned to the initial position shown in FIG. 30A, the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is engaged with the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side. By engaging, the first structure 712b is held at the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side is performed. Canceled.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that can slide up and down with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and is urged downward by a spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is disengaged from the slider 721, the slider urged by the spring 722 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. The cover means 718 in this example has a character face, but other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) and the like may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the base portion 712 g is provided with a magnet 712 n for attracting the iron metal piece 712 c 7 provided in the pair of third structures 712 c by a magnetic force. When 712b is inclined about 180 ° toward the front, the pair of third structures 712c are held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  In addition, a pair of magnets 712b1 are disposed at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are disposed at the positions where they are placed. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is configured to be attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and the initial position is maintained.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the left side in front view has a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the left side in front view of the fourth structure body 712a, and is rotatable to the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 is disposed, the upper left body portion 712c4 is fixed to the arm portion 712c3, and the cap portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 are fixed to the upper left body portion 712c4.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the right side when viewed from the front, and can be rotated by the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 to be disposed, the upper right body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper right body portion 712c4 are configured.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b on the left side when viewed from the front, and is rotatable with respect to the support portion 712d1 via a support shaft 712d2. The arm portion 712d3 is provided, the lower left half body portion 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. The

  As shown in FIG. 21, the second structure 712d on the right side in the front view includes a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure 712b, and a support shaft 712d2 interposed between the support portion 712d1. An arm portion 712d3 that is rotatably arranged, a lower right body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It is configured.

  In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, the upper left half 712c4, the hat 712c5, and the school emblem 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side when viewed from the front, and the upper right half 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front. , The hat portion 712c5, the school badge portion 712c6, the left lower body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front, and the lower right body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the right side when viewed from the front. A character is formed.

<Light-emitting means of an accessory unit / falling-expanding accessory unit / falling-expanding accessory>
FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view in which the peripheral members of the first structure 712b are extracted, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view in which the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a are extracted. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a.

  A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting units 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and by the plurality of second light emitting units 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through cover means 718 disposed in front. A light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a disposed in front.

  As shown in FIG. 22, a first harness capable of electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the first sub-control unit 400 to the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure 712a is connectable. The connector CN1, the second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the light emitting board 714 of the fourth structure 712a and the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotation motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotation motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Household unit / Climbing unit>
FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the rising accessory unit 750. As shown in FIG. 23, the ascending combination unit 750 mainly includes a base 752, a drive unit 754 disposed on the left side of the base 752, as viewed from the front, a first ascending combination 756, and a second ascent. And an accessory 758.

  The drive unit 754 includes a drive base 754a fixed to the base 752 with screws, a drive motor 754b attached to the drive base 754a, a drive gear 754c fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 754b, and the drive gear 754c. A plurality of gears 754d for transmitting the motive power, a sensor 754e capable of detecting the position of the detection piece 754d1 provided on one of the plurality of gears 754d, and one gear of the plurality of gears 754d. And a cam 754f meshing with each other.

  The first ascending combination 756 includes a first ascending combination base 756a and an arm portion 756b that can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around the left side of the first rising combination base 756a as viewed from the front. The first ascending feature slider 756c that can slide in the vertical direction in conjunction with the rotation of the arm portion 756b, and the first ascent that represents the appearance of the rock attached to the first ascending feature slider 756c An accessory decoration portion 756d.

  The arm portion 756b is engaged with the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754d of the drive portion 754, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise by rotating the cam 754d. The first ascending combination slider 756c and the first ascending combination decoration 756d are raised when the arm 756b is rotated counterclockwise, and are lowered when the arm 756b is rotated clockwise.

  The second ascending combination 758 includes a second ascending combination base 758a, a second ascending combination slider 758b slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the second ascending combination base 758a, A second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c representing the appearance of the rock, attached to the ascending accessory slider 758b, an unlocking portion 758d capable of preventing the second ascending accessory slider 758b from descending, and a cover Part 758e.

  The second ascending agent slider 758b is disposed at a position where it can be engaged with the first ascending agent slider 756c, and the first ascending agent slider 756c is raised by a predetermined amount, whereby the first ascending agent slider 756b is raised. It is configured to rise in conjunction with the accessory slider 756c (details will be described later).

  The unlocking portion 758d has a solenoid 758d1, a shaft portion 758d2 that is slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 758d1, and a claw portion 758d3 that is engaged with the shaft portion 758d2 and is slidable in the direction indicated by symbol B. Configured.

  Although details will be described later, when the claw portion 758d3 is extended by operating the solenoid 758d1, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b is prevented (locked) and fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The second raised accessory decoration portion 758c thus made is held at the raised position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to retract the claw portion 758d3, the second ascending combination slider 758b is allowed to descend (unlocked), and the second ascending combination slider 758b is fixed to the second ascending combination slider 758b. The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c slides downward due to its own weight.

<Functional unit / Launched functional unit>
FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged perspective view of the relay board 806 provided in the launching accessory unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the launching accessory unit 800 is mainly provided on a plate-like rear unit 802, a launching mechanism portion 804 disposed below the rear unit 802, and the right side of the rear unit 802 when viewed from the front. A relay board 806 disposed in the vicinity of the game ball passage 802a, a protective film 808 attached to the surface of the relay board 806, and a spacer for forming a movable space of a small piece accessory 804d composed of a plurality of small pieces 810 and a plate-like front unit 812 that covers the front surface of the spacer 810.

  The launch mechanism portion 804 includes a slider 804a provided at a position engageable with the convex portion on the back side of the cam 754f of the ascending accessory unit 750, a spring 804b that urges the slider 804a upward, and a slider 804a that moves up and down. A guide portion 804c that guides in the direction, a small piece accessory 804d that is disposed in a free state above the slider 804a, and a pair of guide rails 804e that guide the small piece role 804d in the direction of the slider 804a. Configured.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 25, a protective film 808 is affixed to the front surface of the relay substrate 806 except for connectors and the like. The relay board 806 is disposed in the game ball path 802a of the rear unit 802. In this example, the game passing through the game ball path 802a is performed by attaching a protective film 808 to the front surface of the relay board 806. The ball is configured not to contact the relay board 806 (so that the game ball passing through the game ball passage 802a and the relay board 806 are insulated). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the electrical system is short-circuited or the relay board 806 is damaged in the relay board 806, and stable game control may be performed.

<Functional unit / V forming functional unit>
FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the V forming accessory unit 850. As shown in FIG. 26, the V forming combination unit 850 includes a V forming combination left unit 852 disposed on the left side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view and a V formation disposed on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view. And an accessory right unit 854. In addition, since the V forming agent left unit 852 and the V forming agent right unit 854 have a symmetrical structure, detailed description of the V forming agent right unit 854 will be omitted below.

  The V forming accessory left unit 852 includes a V forming accessory left base 852a, a driving portion 852b disposed at a lower end of the V forming accessory left base 852a, and a left link portion rotatable by the driving portion 852b. 852c, a decorative portion 852d fixed to the V forming accessory left base 852a, a left light emitting substrate 852e disposed on the V forming accessory left base 852a, and a V forming left movable attached to the left link portion 852c A portion 852f, a V-shaped left decorative portion 852g attached to the V-shaped left movable portion 852f, and a left light guide slope 852h attached to the left light-emitting substrate 852e.

  The drive unit 852b includes a drive motor 852b1 attached to the V-forming accessory left base 852a, a drive gear 852b2 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 852b1, and a cam 852b3 rotated by the drive gear 852b2. It is configured.

  The V forming left movable portion 852f of the V forming accessory left unit 852 can be rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle about the upper end portion by driving the driving portion 852b. The V-shaped right movable portion 854f can be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end portion as a fulcrum by driving the drive portion 854b. Therefore, by driving the drive unit 852b and the drive 854d at the same time, the V-shaped left movable unit 852f and the V-formed right movable unit 854f form a V-shape in front view.

  FIG. 27 is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V forming accessory right unit 854 as seen from the back side. Ejector pin marks 854h1 formed at the time of molding remain in two places above the right light guide plate 854h. The ejector pin mark 854h1 is a recess that is inevitably formed when the right light guide plate 854h is molded, and the thickness of the portion including the ejector pin mark 854h1 is smaller than the thickness of the portion without the ejector pin mark 854h1. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the light emitting means (in this example, LED) mounted on the right light emitting substrate 854e of the V forming accessory right unit 854 is disposed so as to face the ejector pin mark 854h1. With such a structure, there are cases where the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) can be increased to enhance the effect.

<Functional unit / Center functional unit>
FIG. 28 is a front view of the center accessory unit 900, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900.

  The center accessory 900 includes a decoration portion 902 disposed on the upper part of the game board 200 and a light emitting substrate 904 disposed on the back side of the decoration portion 902. The decorative portion 902 of the present example includes a plurality of first portions 902a (see FIG. 29) arranged radially around the center accessory opening 900a at predetermined intervals, and an inner side of the first portion 902a. And a second portion 902b (see FIG. 28) that forms the outer edge of the center accessory opening 900a.

  The first part 902a is a part made of a transparent or translucent member capable of transmitting light. In this example, a part of the plurality of first parts 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center accessory 900. The light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light and the light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b described above. Both of them can be transmitted. On the other hand, the second portion 902b is a portion made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.

<Operation of falling unfolding agent>
Next, operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 is demonstrated using FIGS. 30-34. As described above, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 can be moved up and down to slide in the up-and-down direction and rotate to rotate the first structure 712b forward.

<Dropping and unfolding action / vertical movement>
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the up and down movement of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 by extracting only the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down movement of the expansion | deployment combination 712.

  FIG. 30A and FIG. 31A show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation. The initial position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the whole of the falling and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900 above the game board 200.

  In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the character's face) applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is visible from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. The center effect 900 and the falling and unfolding feature 712 provide an integrated performance. The initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. All 208 display areas are visible.

  FIG. 30B and FIG. 31B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the up-and-down operation. In the case where the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 18) is operated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches the intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and unfolding combination 712 at the initial position descends and a part of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900. In this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop-deployment accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display is displayed from the front. Although the upper part of the display area of the device 208 becomes invisible, most of the display area is visible.

  FIG. 30C and FIG. 31B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation. The maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and developing agent 712 at the intermediate position further descends, and a part of the dropping and developing agent 712 does not overlap the center agent 900 (do not overlap). Further, the maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and is decorative from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Operation / Rotation operation of falling unfolding agent>
FIG. 32 is a view showing the rotation operation of the falling and unfolding combination 712 by extracting only the dropping and unfolding combination unit 700, and FIGS. 33 and 34 show the dropping and unfolding combination unit in a state of being installed on the game board 200 FIG. 7 is a view showing a rotation operation of a drop unfolding accessory 712 in 700.

  FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b Two left and right third structures 712c that rotate in directions close to each other as fulcrums and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d approach each other using the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 21) is released, the slider 721 pushes the cover means 718 downward. For this reason, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined about 45 ° toward the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  32 (b) and 33 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 45 ° to 90 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are converted into the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the direction closer to each other than the state rotated by 45 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two right and left second structures 712d are the first The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  Since the cover means 718 is structured to slide downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is in a state where the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 ° toward the front. Even if it exists, the protrusion amount to the front side of the cover means 718 can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, it is possible to avoid the gaming board 200 from becoming unnecessarily thick, and to avoid the situation where the cover means 718 comes into contact with other members.

  FIGS. 32 (c) and 34 (a) are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced with the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the directions closer to each other than the state rotated by 90 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 32 (d) and 34 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced by the first structure 712b. The two third left and right third interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right sides are brought into contact with each other by rotating in directions closer to each other than the state rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structures 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in a state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the near side.

  In addition, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and the character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two right and left third structures 712c. Is done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (the book) disposed on the fourth structure 712a. In the example, part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus cannot be viewed from the front.

<Operation of the rising and launching unit>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 36 is installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the rising bonus unit 750 and the launching bonus unit 800 in the state.

  FIGS. 35 (a) and 36 (a) are front views showing a state in which the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are located at the initial positions, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 36 (a). b) shows a front view of the process in which the ascending combination unit 750 is operated and the first ascending combination decoration 756d and the second ascending combination decoration 758c are rising.

  When the cam 754f is rotated clockwise by the operation of the drive motor 754b, the arm 756b is rotated counterclockwise by being pushed up by the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f. When the arm portion 756b rotates counterclockwise, the first ascending combination slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides upward, and the first ascending combination slider 756c is fixed to the first ascending combination slider 756c. The rising accessory decoration portion 756d rises.

  When the first ascending combination slider 756c is slid upward by a predetermined amount, the engaging portion 756c1 of the first ascending combination slider 756c is moved to the engaging portion 758b1 of the second ascending combination slider 758b. Engage. Accordingly, the second ascending accessory slider 758b slides upward together with the first ascending accessory slider 756c, and the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b is moved. To rise.

  FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 36 (c) are front views showing a state in which the first rising accessory decoration portion 756d and the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c are raised to the maximum height. When the sensor 754e (see FIG. 23) detects that the cam 754f has further rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35 (b) to the position shown in FIG. 35 (c), the solenoid 758d1 is activated. The claw portion 758d3 extends in the direction of the second rising accessory slider 758b. When the claw portion 758d3 extends, the second ascending combination slider 758b cannot slide downward, and the second ascending combination slider 758b is prevented from being lowered (locked). The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the object slider 758b is held at the maximum height shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d) are front views showing a state in which the launching accessory unit 800 is activated. The cam 754f further rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35C, and the engagement between the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f and the arm portion 756b is released. As a result, the first rising combination slider 756c that engages with the arm portion 756b slides downward, and the first rising combination decoration 756d fixed to the first rising combination slider 756c moves downward. The effect of slid to (i.e., the effect of expressing that a part of the ascending accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock has been destroyed and sunk downward) is executed.

  On the other hand, since the lowering of the second ascending combination slider 758b remains blocked (locked) by the extended claw portion 758d3, the second ascending combination fixed to the second ascending combination slider 758b. The object decoration portion 758c remains held at the raised position.

  When the cam 754f rotates to release the engagement between the rear-side convex portion of the cam 754f and the slider 804a (see FIG. 24) of the launching accessory unit 800, the slider 804a biased by the spring 804b moves upward. An effect that slides in the direction and the small piece role 804d is launched vigorously upward (an effect that expresses that a part of the ascending feature unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock is scattered) is executed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d), in addition to the effects by the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, the falling unfolded accessory 712 is shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 31. After the effect of sliding downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (c) to the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 30 (c) or FIG. 31 (c) is performed, the rotating action of the drop unfolding accessory 712 (shown in FIG. 32). The effect by the rotation operation) is executed.

<Game ball passage>
In this example, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the ascending accessory unit 750 is provided with a first game ball passage 750a and a second game ball passage 750b through which a game ball can pass, Below one game ball passage 750a, an inclined surface 750c that is inclined downward in the front direction is formed. The inclined surface 750 c serves to guide the game ball that has passed through the first game ball passage 750 a to the lower side of the game board 200. In the case of an enclosed game machine, the game balls that have passed through the first game ball passage 750a and the second game ball passage 750b may be guided to the circulation route.

<Game Ball Reservoir and Climbing Unit>
FIG. 37A is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending combination unit 750 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 37B shows a state where the ascending combination unit 750 is operating. It is side sectional drawing of the game board 200 of.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example includes two game ball storage units, a game ball storage unit 200a5 and a second game ball storage unit 200a10. However, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), game balls that have fallen behind the pachinko machine 100 over the wall 200a3 and the like of the game board 200 are stored in any of the game ball storage units 200a5 and 200a10. In some cases, it reaches above the ascending accessory unit 750 located at the initial position and is in contact with the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c.

  In such a case, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example moves the game ball that is in contact with the second ascending accessory decoration unit 758c as the ascending accessory unit 750 moves in accordance with the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750. From the area, it can be guided to the front game ball storage unit 200a5. For this reason, the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 is not hindered by the game ball, and a failure of the ascending accessory unit 750 may be prevented in advance.

<Operation of the V forming accessory unit>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the operation of the V forming combination unit 850 with only the V forming combination unit 850 extracted, and FIG. 39 is the operation of the V forming combination unit 850 in the state of being installed on the game board 200. FIG.

  FIGS. 38 (a) and 39 (a) show front views when the V forming accessory unit 850 is located at the initial position. FIGS. 38 (b) and 39 (b) The front view in case the forming combination unit 850 operates and is located in the intermediate position is shown.

  When the drive motor 852b1 of the V forming accessory left unit 852 is driven, the V forming left movable portion 852f rotates counterclockwise via the left link portion 852c, and drives the drive motor 854b1 of the V forming accessory right unit 854. Then, the V forming right movable portion 854f rotates clockwise via the right link portion 854c. As a result, the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f are in a state of being closer to each other than the initial position.

  FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (c) show a front view when the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated and is located at the maximum movement position. When the V-formation left movable part 852f and the V-formation right movable part 854f rotate to the maximum movement position, they are in a state closer to each other than the intermediate position, and the V-formation left movable part 852f and the V-formation right movable part 854f A V-shape is formed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is confirmed), the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated, and the V forming left movable portion 852f and the V forming right movable portion 854f are operated. By forming a V-shape in front view, the player is configured to suggest that a predetermined condition has been established.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example is provided with the production means (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20). The effect means is a means having a first structure (for example, a first structure 712b shown in FIG. 20), and the effect means is a second structure (for example, FIG. 20). And the first structure is a structure capable of unfolding effect operation, and the second structure moves in accordance with the unfolding effect operation. The first structure is moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, FIG. 32 (d)) by the development effect operation. To the position rotated 180 ° from the initial position to the front side). It is a possible structure, and the second structure is moved from the second position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to the fifth position (for example, FIG. 32D by the development effect operation). ), The first structure at the first position (for example, the first structure 712b) is the second structure at the second position. (For example, the first structure 712b) is a structure located in front of the first structure (eg, the first structure) at the fourth position as shown in FIG. 32 (d). The body 712b) is a structure located behind the second structure (eg, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position, and the first structure is the fourth position. The foremost part of the effect means located at the position is the effect means where the first structure is located at the first position. It is located in front of the foremost part of the game table.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to provide various effects while having a simple structure, and to improve the interest of the player in some cases. In addition, there may be a novel effect in which the effect means approaches the player side by the unfolding effect operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure (for example, the second structure) at the second position. The structure 712d) may cover at least a part from the front. As shown in FIG. 32D, the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position is the first structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fourth position. A structure that covers at least a part of the first structure 712b) from the front may be used.

  In addition, the effect means is means having first light emitting means (for example, first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 21B), and as shown in FIG. The first structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first light emitting unit from the front. Further, as shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) includes the first structure (for example, the first structure). 712b) becomes visible by the player during the movement from the first position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32 (d)). It may be a means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the fourth position is the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means). 716a) may be a structure that does not cover from the front. Further, the effect means is a means having a third structure (for example, a third structure 712c shown in FIG. 20), and the third structure is the first structure (for example, the first structure 712c). It may be a structure that moves in accordance with the movement of one structure 712b). The third structure is movable from a third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a sixth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32D). It may be.

  In addition, at least a part of a second end (for example, an upper end) of the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d illustrated in FIG. 32D) at the fifth position is It is possible to contact at least a part of the third end (for example, the lower end) of the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32 (d)) at the sixth position. Also good.

  In addition, the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position is the same as the first light emitting unit (for example, the first light emitting unit 716a). It may be a structure that covers at least a portion from the front. In addition, the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position is the same as the first light emitting unit (for example, the first light emitting unit 716a). It may be a structure that covers a part from the front.

  Further, the effect means is means having second light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means includes the first structure. It may be a means capable of emitting light when located at the first position. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is a means provided in the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b). May be.

  Further, the effect means is means having cover means (for example, cover means 718 shown in FIG. 21A). For example, as shown in FIG. 21, the cover means is the second light emitting means ( For example, it is means for covering the second light emitting means 714a). For example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to (d), the cover means is the first structure of the first structure. It may be a means capable of changing a relative position with the second light emitting means during the movement from the position to the fourth position.

  Further, the effect means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting means (LED) provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the third light emitting means. May be means capable of emitting light when the first structure is located at the fourth position. The third light emitting unit may be a unit provided in the first structure. The rendering means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is the light emitting substrate. The third light emitting means may be a means provided on the second surface of the light emitting substrate.

  In addition, the foremost part (the part that protrudes the most forward) of the effect means (for example, the drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 32D) in which the first structure is located at the fourth position is The first structure may be located in front of the foremost part of the effect means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 30) located at the first position.

  The first structure may be a rotatable structure. Moreover, a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 2) may be provided, and the effect means may be a means that can move in front of the display means. The first structure may be a structure that can rotate around an axis parallel to the display means (for example, an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 2). .

  Further, the effect means may be a means having a second light emitting substrate, and the first light emitting means may be a means provided on the second light emitting substrate. The second light emitting board may be a board that relays the presentation control means and the light emitting board. Further, the effect means may be means having drive means, and the drive means may be means for moving the first structure.

  Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the driving means. Further, the effect means may be means having detection means, and the detection means may be means for detecting the first structure located at the first position. Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the detection means.

  The second light emitting board is a board having a first connector, the first connector is connected to a first harness, and the first harness is connected to the driving means and the detection. The first harness connected to the means may be a bifurcated harness.

  Further, the effect means may be a means having a fourth structure, and the fourth structure may be a structure having the second light emitting substrate. One of the first structure and the fourth structure is a structure having a first magnet, and the other of the first structure and the fourth structure is The first magnetic body or the second magnet is a structural body, and the first magnetic body or the second magnet is attracted to the first magnet, whereby the first structural body is The first position may be maintained.

  Further, the first magnetic body or the second magnet may be adsorbed to the first magnet via non-magnetism. One of the first structure and the third structure is a structure having a third magnet, and the other of the first structure and the third structure is , A second magnetic body or a structure having a fourth magnet, and the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet is attracted to the third magnet, whereby the third structure is The sixth position may be maintained.

  Further, the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet may be attracted to the third magnet via a non-magnetic body. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more driving means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more detection means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or more of the second structures. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more third structures. The first structure may have a first image display unit capable of displaying an image at the first position. The first structure may include second image display means capable of displaying an image at the fourth position.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example includes a first driving unit (for example, a driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, 23. A gaming machine equipped with a first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first rendering means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)). Second operation by driving the first driving means 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (c), for example, is a means capable of executing the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d ascending), and the second action by the second rendering means. In the meantime, the first operation by the first effect means is executed, and the first effect means is operated by driving the second drive means to activate a third action (for example, actuating a solenoid 758d1). The game machine is characterized in that it is a means capable of executing the action of lowering the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to provide various effects while having a simple structure, and to improve the interest of the player in some cases.

  The first operation may be an operation different from the third operation. Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c), the first operation is performed when the first rendering means is in the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)). ) To a second position (for example, the maximum height position shown in FIG. 35C). In the third operation, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) moves to the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A). It may be an action.

  In the second operation, the second rendering means moves from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). It may be an operation to move to the next position. In addition, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) contacts (engages) the second effect means (eg, the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d). By this, it may be a means capable of executing the first operation.

  Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) is prevented from being lowered (locked) by the fifth position (for example, the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35 (d)). The fifth position is the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) and the second position (for example, FIG. 35). It may be a position between (the position of the maximum height shown in (c)).

  Further, the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is a position higher than the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)), The first rendering means is configured so that, by its own weight, the nail shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 35 (d)) from the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height illustrated in FIG. 35 (c)). It may be a means capable of moving to a position where the lowering is prevented (locked) by the portion 758d3. Further, the first effect means is driven by the second drive means so that the lowering is prevented (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35 (d). ) To a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35A).

  The first driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. The second driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. Moreover, a 3rd effect means may be provided and the said 3rd effect means may be a means which can perform a 4th operation | movement by the drive of a said 1st drive means. Moreover, a 4th presentation means is provided, The said 4th presentation means may be a means which can perform a 5th operation | movement by the drive of a said 1st drive means. The first rendering means may include at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means. The second rendering means may include at least one of light emitting means, display means, and other driving means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to this example discharges the game ball that has entered the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2) to the outside of the gaming table. Ball passage portions (for example, an arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 35 (b), a first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c), and a second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35 (c)). The game machine is characterized in that it includes a movable body for production (for example, an ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 35).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there may be a case where unnecessary game balls can be discharged out of the gaming machine at the same time as providing an effect.

  The effect movable body may be a movable body located behind the stage. The effect movable body is a movable body having an arm portion (for example, an arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 37). For example, as shown in FIGS. May be an arm portion whose angle can be changed by the operation of the effect movable body, and the arm portion may be an arm portion capable of discharging a game ball by changing the angle. Further, it may be provided with first ball passage means (for example, first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C) through which the game ball discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass.

  Further, the first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C) is one side in the left-right direction of the effect movable body (for example, the front of the ascending accessory unit 750). It may be a means provided on the left side). In addition, second ball passage means (for example, second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35C) through which a game ball discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass is provided. Also good. Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided on the other side of the movable body in the left-right direction (for example, the right side of the ascending accessory unit 750 when viewed from the front). The second ball passage means may be a means provided with a substrate (for example, the relay substrate 806 shown in FIGS. 24 and 25), and the substrate may be an insulating means (for example, FIG. It may be a means provided with a protective film 808) shown in FIG.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example can receive the game ball that has entered the back of the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2). It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising a large receiving part (for example, the game ball storage part 200a5 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, an unnecessary game ball can be easily removed by a store clerk or the like of the game store, and the maintainability may be improved.

  Further, the receiving part may be a receiving part capable of storing game balls. The receiving part may be a receiving part capable of discharging a game ball. The receiving portion is a receiving portion capable of storing a game ball when in the first state, and the receiving portion discharges the game ball when in the second state. The first state is a state capable of storing game balls that have entered the back of the stage, and the second state has entered the back of the stage. The game ball may not be stored.

  Moreover, the said receiving part has a storage part which can store a game ball, and the said receiving part has a guide part (for example, guide part 200a6 shown in FIG. 16) which guides a game ball to the said storage part. You may have. Moreover, the said guidance | induction part may incline toward the said storage part. Further, a wall portion (for example, a wall portion 200a3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16) is provided between the stage and the receiving portion. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the stage includes the wall portion. The receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end portion of the wall portion.

  Further, a movable body (for example, a second ascending accessory decorative portion 758d of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 37) may be provided, and the receiving portion may be a receiving portion provided in front of the movable body. . For example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving part may be a receiving part capable of receiving a game ball that has been in contact with the movable body by the operation of the movable body. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving part may be provided in a region different from the operation region of the movable body. Further, a ball passage (for example, a game ball passage 200a11 shown in FIG. 14) may be provided below the receiving portion.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example has a structure (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) (for example, 28, and a movable body (for example, a falling and unfolding role 712 shown in FIG. 28), wherein a part of the movable body is removed from the window. Is a game stand characterized by being visible.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, the movable body can be displayed in various ways, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the movable body (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is located at the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 31 (a)), When a part can be visually recognized by the player and the movable body is located at the second position (for example, the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 31 (c)), the player can remove the movable body from the window. It may be invisible.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31A, the movable body positioned at the first position may be a movable body overlapped with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, the movable body positioned at the second position may be a movable body that does not overlap the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, the movable body positioned at the second position may be visible to the player.

  Further, the movable body is provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B), and the movable body located at the second position is a movable body that overlaps the display means. There may be. Further, the movable body may be a movable body having light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A).

  Further, at least a part of the structure (for example, the first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) may be transparent or translucent. Moreover, the site | part which has the 1st display (for example, character) may be sufficient as the site | part overlapped with the said structure of the said movable body located in said 1st position. The first display may be a character or a character. Further, a part of the movable body visible to the player from the window portion may have a second display (for example, the character's face shown in FIG. 28). Further, the second display may be a display having an outline corresponding to the outline of the window portion. Further, the window part may have a transmissive part having transparency, and the window part may be an opening part.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to this example has a decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28) and light emission that can emit light. Means (for example, a drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28), and a transmission portion (for example, a first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) of the decorative cover. ), The player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is a movable means.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, there are cases where the effects by the light emitting means can be varied and the effects can be enhanced.

  Further, the decorative cover may be a non-movable decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28). In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the drop and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is not passed through the decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 318). The player may be able to see the light from the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the light emitting means (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the first position is connected to the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory shown in FIG. 318). 900, a decorative cover). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the second position is connected to the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory shown in FIG. 318). 900 non-overlapping means).

  Further, the light emitting means (for example, the drop unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is a means having a second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop unfolding combination 712), and the second decorative cover. May be transparent or translucent, and the second decorative cover may be a decorative cover movable in accordance with movement of the light emitting means.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means is light that can be visually recognized by the player through the second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop unfolding accessory 712) and the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory 900). There may be. In addition, a second light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, the light emitting substrate 904 shown in FIG. 28 or FIG. 29) is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light from the second light emitting means through the decorative cover. The second light emitting means may be a non-movable means.

  In addition, a first part of the decorative cover (for example, a first part 902a shown in FIG. 29) is a part through which light from the light emitting means can pass, and a first part of the decorative cover (for example, The first part 902a) shown in FIG. 29 may be a part through which light from the second light emitting means can pass. The first part may be colorless or colored.

  In addition, a second part (for example, second part 902b shown in FIG. 28) of the decorative cover is a part that does not transmit light of the light emitting means, and a second part (for example, FIG. 28) of the decorative cover. The second portion 902b) shown in FIG. 5 may be a portion that does not transmit light from the second light emitting means. The decorative cover may be configured to be movable. The light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the first mode at the first position, and the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the second mode at the second position, The first aspect and the second aspect may be different or the same.

<Variation 1 of the drop unfolding member>
Next, a falling and unfolding accessory 730 according to Modification 1 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 will be described.

<Fall deployment 730>
FIG. 40 (a) is a front view and a side view of the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 located at the first operating position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a dropping and unfolding located at the second operating position. The front view and side view of the accessory 730 are a front view and a side view of the drop deployment accessory 730 located at the third operating position.

  In each of the drawings (a) to (c), the figure shown on the left side toward the paper surface is a front view of the drop deployment accessory 730, and the figure shown on the right side toward the paper surface is a drop. It is a side view of the deployment accessory 730. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-rear direction of the dropping and developing agent 730, and the left side toward the paper surface is the same as the front direction of the falling and expanding agent 730 (in this example, the front direction of the game table). The right side of the drawing is the rear direction of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 (in this example, the same direction as the back direction of the game table).

<Structure of the falling unfolding member 730>
Next, the structure of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 will be described. The drop-expanding combination 730 includes a first structure 731, a second structure 732 that is substantially the same shape as the first structure 731 and slightly smaller than the first structure 731, and the second structure 732. A support arm 733 that rotatably supports the one structure 731 and the second structure 732, and drive means (not shown) that rotationally drives the support arm 733 are configured. Note that the size and shape of the first structure body and the second structure body according to the present invention are not limited to the first structure body 731 and the second structure body 732 of this example.

  The first structure body 731 covers a plate-shaped first base body 731a, a first light emitting substrate 731b fixed to the first base body 731a, and the entire first light emitting substrate 731b. And a first cover 731c disposed on the surface. A plurality of first light emitting means 731d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at predetermined intervals on the mounting surface on one side of the first light emitting substrate 731b. The first cover 731c is made of a transparent or translucent member and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting means 731d.

  The second structural body 732 covers the entire plate-shaped second base body 732a, the second light emitting substrate 732b fixed to the second base body 732a, and the second light emitting substrate 732b. And a second cover 732c disposed on the surface. A plurality of second light emitting means 732d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at a predetermined interval on the mounting surface on one side of the second light emitting substrate 732b. The second cover 732c is made of a transparent or translucent member and can transmit light emitted from the second light emitting means 732d.

  The drop deploying member 730 is arranged so that the first base body 731a of the first structure body 731 and the second base body 732a of the second structure body 732 are shifted in a predetermined direction and bonded together. Are integrated. In other words, in this example, the relative positions of the first structure body 731 and the second structure body 732 are configured not to change.

  The first structure and the second structure according to the present invention are not limited to a structure in which two structures are integrated, and the first structure and the second structure are separate bodies. Each of them may be individually movable. That is, the relative position of the first structure body and the second structure body according to the present invention may be changed. Moreover, when both are made into a different body, you may provide the 1st drive means which drives a 1st structure at least, and the 2nd drive means which drives a 2nd structure at least. .

  In addition, the first light emitting unit 731d and the second light emitting unit 732d are not limited to LEDs, and instead of (or in addition to) LEDs, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, and an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence). ) Other display means and light emitting means including a display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In this example, the surface area of the first cover 731c is made larger than the surface area of the second cover 732c, and the number of the first light emitting means 731d (LEDs) is more than the number of the second light emitting means 732d (LEDs). There are also many. Thereby, the production mode by the 1st base body 731 and the production mode by the 2nd base body 732 can be varied, and the production effect of a game stand can be heightened. The surface area of the first cover 731c and the second cover 732c may be the same, or the number of the first light emitting means 731d (LED) and the second light emitting means 732d (LED) may be the same. .

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 730>
Next, the operation of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 will be described. The dropping and unfolding accessory 730 rotates the support arm 733 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction indicated by a symbol A in FIG. 40A) by a driving unit (not shown) (for example, a driving motor). The first structure body 731 and the second structure body 732 can be integrally rotated. In addition, the rotation direction of the drop unfolding accessory 730 is not limited to this example, and instead of (or in addition to) the predetermined direction, the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the sign A in FIG. (A clockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by) may be rotatable.

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 730 / first operation position (initial operation position)>
The state shown in FIG. 40A is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “initial operation position”). In the first operation position, the first structure 731 is located in front of the second structure 732. For this reason, as shown in the front view of FIG. 40A, a part of the second structure 732 is overlapped with a part of the first structure 731 (in the second structure 732). A part of the second structure 732 is not overlapped with the first structure 731 (a part of the second structure 732 is not visible from the front). In a state where it can be seen from the front.

  Further, in this state, the first light emitting means 731d can emit light, and an effect or a notice can be executed by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. Here, as an effect or a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d, for example, a light effect as a notice, an issue effect as a look-ahead notice, a light effect as a reach effect, a light effect as a jackpot effect, or a bonus effect Lighting effects, effects for exciting benefits such as RT and AT, effects suggesting the pressing order of stop buttons, gasses effects (false effects), and the like. The light emission mode of the first light emitting unit 731d is not particularly limited, and examples include all lighting, partial lighting, blinking at a predetermined interval, irregular blinking, lighting with a predetermined lighting pattern, and the like.

<Operation of Falling Deployment Tool 730 / Second Operational Position>
Subsequently, when the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position, the support arm 733 is rotated 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 40A). Then, the falling and unfolding accessory 730 rotates to the second operation position shown in FIG. In this second operation position, the position of the front end portion 732e of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end portion 731e of the first structure 731 in the front-rear direction. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the middle of the rotation of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 from the first operation position to the second operation position, the position of the front end portion 732e of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is There is a state in which the front end portion 731e of the first structure 731 has the same position as the position in the front-rear direction.

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 730 / third operation position>
Subsequently, when the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the second operation position, the support arm 733 is rotated 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 40A). Then, the drop unfolding accessory 730 rotates to the third operation position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 732 is positioned in front of the first structure 731. Therefore, in the second structure 732, the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the third operating position is more than the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operating position. It becomes easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position of the front end portion 732f of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end portion 731f of the first structure 731 in the front-rear direction. In this state, a part of the first structure 731 is overlapped with a part of the second structure 732 (a part of the first structure 731 is not visible from the front). However, the other part of the first structure 731 is not overlapped with the second structure 732 (the other part of the first structure 731 is visible from the front).

  Further, in this state, the second light emitting means 732d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d can be executed. Here, as an effect or a notice by light emission of the second light emitting means 732d, for example, a light effect as a notice, an issue effect as a look-ahead notice, a light effect as a reach effect, a light effect as a jackpot effect, or a bonus effect Lighting effects, effects for exciting benefits such as RT and AT, effects suggesting the pressing order of stop buttons, gasses effects (false effects), and the like. The light emission mode of the second light emitting means 732d is not particularly limited, and examples include all lighting, partial lighting, blinking at a predetermined interval, irregular blinking, lighting with a predetermined lighting pattern, and the like.

  In this example, in the state where the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position, the first light emitting unit 731d can produce effects and notices by the light emission, but other states (for example, In the middle of the movement of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 from the first operation position to the second operation position), it may be possible to produce effects and notices. In addition, in the state in which the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the third operation position, the second light emitting means 732d can produce an effect or a notice by the light emission. In the middle of the movement of the object 730 from the second operation position to the third operation position), it may be possible to produce an effect or a notice.

<Initial operation of the drop unfolding accessory 730>
Next, the initial operation of the drop unfolding accessory 730 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the initial operation of the drop unfolding accessory 730 in time series. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 41, the first cover 731c of the first structure 731 and the second cover 732c of the second structure 732 are not shown, and FIG. In the figure (g), illustration of the support arm 733 is omitted.

  In this example, the support arm 733 of the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is configured to be movable up and down with respect to the game board 200, and the falling and unfolding accessory 730 can be moved in the vertical direction by a driving means (not shown). In addition, as described above, when the support arm 733 is rotationally driven, the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 itself can also rotate. The shape and size of the support arm 733 are not particularly limited, and the support arm 733 may be formed of a transparent, translucent, or colored member, and a light emitting means (for example, LED) is provided on the support arm 733. It may be configured to emit light by being arranged, or a wiring cable may be arranged behind the support arm 733.

  In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged on the game board 200, and the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is configured to be movable up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, when the falling unfolding accessory 730 descends (or rises) to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with a part of the falling unfolding accessory 730. (A part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible from the front). Note that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 may be configured to be movable up and down behind the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the drop developing agent 730, a part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a drop developing agent. It may be configured such that a privilege (for example, big hit, bonus, AT, etc.) advantageous to the player is more easily given than a state where the portion 730 is not overlapped.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with the left V-shaped forming unit 852 on the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 200 as a role other than the falling and unfolding role 730, and on the right side when viewed from the front of the game board 200. A V forming combination right unit 854 is disposed, and a first rising combination 756 and a second rising combination 758 are disposed on the lower side of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In other words, the pachinko machine 100 has a V forming accessory left unit 852 and a V forming accessory right unit 854 as a structure (third structure) other than the first structure 731 and the second structure 732. , A first rising role 756, a second rising role 758, and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) is a state in which the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the uppermost part (initial position) of the game board 200, and is a state immediately before starting the initial operation. In this state, the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 40B is a state in which the support arm 733 is lowered so that the dropped and unfolded accessory 730 is lowered from the initial position shown in FIG. 41A to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there. In this state, the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 40C is the first operating position shown in FIG. 40A while the support arm 733 is driven to rotate forward so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. This is a state after performing a forward 90-degree rotation operation from the (initial operation position) to the second operation position shown in FIG. Further, this state is also a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730, but the overlap is more than the state shown in FIG. The displayed area is small.

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (d) is the second operating position shown in FIG. 40 (b), while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven forward, so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. From FIG. 40C to the third operation position shown in FIG. Further, this state is also a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c). The overlapped display area is different from the state.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 40 (e) is the third operating position shown in FIG. 40 (c), while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven rearward, so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. To the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b), after being rotated 90 degrees backward, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 41 (c).

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (f) is the second operating position shown in FIG. 40 (b) while keeping the vertical position of the drop deployment accessory 730 by rotating the support arm 733 backward. To the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. 40 (a), after being rotated 90 degrees backward, in the same state as the state shown in FIG. 41 (b). is there.

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (g) is a state in which the support arm 733 is lifted so that the dropped and unfolded accessory 730 returns from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the initial position shown in FIG. 41 (a). Yes, just after finishing the initial operation. In this state, the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

<Notice by light emission of light emitting means>
Next, a notice by light emission of the light emitting means will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a notice by light emission of the light emitting means in time series. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 42, the first cover 731c of the first structure 731, the second cover 732c of the second structure 732, and the support arm 733 are omitted. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 can execute an effect or notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d and an effect or notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42B, the first light emission is triggered when the first notice start condition is satisfied in the state shown in FIG. A notice by the light emission of the means 731d (in this example, a notice of a mode in which all the first light emitting means 731d are turned on) is started. Here, as “the establishment of the first notice start condition”, for example, it was determined that the result of the pre-reading was determined to be a win, it was determined to shift to the reach state, and the result of the determination was determined to be a big hit This includes the fact that the bonus was won internally, the AT was awarded, and the effect lottery was won.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42 (c) is a state in which the support arm 733 is lowered, so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is lowered from the initial position shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there. In this state, the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. 40A, and the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is continued. In this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area that displays the decorative symbol) falls while the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is being executed. It is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the unfolding accessory 730.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42D is the first operating position shown in FIG. 40A while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven forward so that the drop deployment accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. This is a state after performing a forward 90-degree rotation operation from the (initial operation position) to the second operation position shown in FIG. In this state, while the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is continued, the advance notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is triggered when the second notice start condition is satisfied (in this example, all the notices are emitted). The advance notice of the mode of lighting the second light emitting means 732d is started. Here, as “satisfaction of the second notice start condition”, for example, it is determined that the result of the pre-reading is determined to be a win, it is determined to shift to the reach state, and the result of the determination is determined to be a big hit. This includes the fact that the bonus was won internally, the AT was awarded, and the effect lottery was won.

  In this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area displaying the decorative symbol) is emitted by the first light emitting means 731d and the second light emitting means 732d. Is overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 during execution of the advance notice, but the overlapped display area is smaller than the state shown in FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 42 (e) is the second operating position shown in FIG. 40 (b), while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven forward, so that the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. From FIG. 40C to the third operation position shown in FIG. In this state, when the first notice end condition is satisfied, the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is terminated, while the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is continued. Here, as “satisfaction of the first notice end condition”, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first notice start condition was established, that the falling unfolding accessory 730 moved to the third operation position. This means that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation.

  In this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) falls while the advance notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is being executed. Although it is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the unfolding combination 730, the overlapped display area is larger than the state shown in FIG. In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is ended when the second notice end condition is satisfied. Here, examples of “satisfaction of the second notice end condition” include, for example, the fact that the drop unfolding accessory 730 has moved to the third operation position, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the second notice start condition was established. This means that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation.

  The state shown in FIG. 42 (g) is the third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c) while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven rearward so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. In this state, a 90-degree rotation operation is performed backward to the second operation position shown in FIG. The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42 (h) is the second operating position shown in FIG. 40 (b) while the support arm 733 is rotationally driven rearward so that the falling and unfolding accessory 730 maintains the vertical position. From the state to the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 42 (i) and FIG. 42 (j) is the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (a) from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the support arm 733 is raised. This is a state after returning to the position, and is a state immediately after finishing the initial operation. In this state, the drop unfolding accessory 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) is not overlapped with a part of the falling unfolding accessory 730. .

<Display example by display means>
Next, display examples by the display unit 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. FIG. 43 shows effects and the like in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 43A to 43H show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in chronological order. 43 (a) to 43 (h) show the display area from the game board 200 to the decorative symbol display device 208, the general diagram display device 210, the special diagram 1 display device 212, the special diagram 2 display device 214, and the general diagram. The holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth graphic display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the usual figure holding number display area a5, and the 4th figure display area a6 of the usual figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. On the right side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central part of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 803 for displaying a variable icon.

  FIG. 43A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, the first off symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol form. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the usual figure variable game is stopped, and on the usual figure display device 210, for example, the off symbol “common figure C” is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol form. In addition, in the normal 4th symbol display area a6, a display indicating that the general variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, in the fluctuation icon display area 803, the fluctuation icon display is not performed and the default display is performed.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is three. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of FIG. 1, and for example, a character image of “爺” is displayed.

  The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Also, the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of normal-use hold is “0”. In addition, in the fluctuation icon display area 803, the fluctuation icon display is not performed and the default display is performed. A number “0” indicating the number of reserved common drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 which repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the central one segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols move from top to bottom is performed (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs and the special figure 1 hold number is “2”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two hold indications h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is two. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “2” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the variation icon display area 803 at the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display by a black circle image is displayed as if the digested suspension has moved.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the variable icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208 b and 208 c, respectively. ing. In FIG. 43 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decorative symbol. This shows a state where the variable display is performed.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 perform variable display of decorative symbols. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with one LED, and the special figure 1 hold number is “1”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 holding number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one holding display h1 is displayed, and it is indicated that the holding number of the special figure 1 is 1. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “1” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the fluctuation icon display area 803, a black circle image is displayed as if the digested hold has moved.

  FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the variable icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time. In addition, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle and right symbol display areas 208b and 208c are in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 44 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. 44 (a) to 44 (h) show operations of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. Also, the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 43 (h).

  44 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decoration symbol. The normal reach state in which the fluctuation display is performed is shown. FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5” indicating a loss is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 44 (c) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is in a state of performing the variable display of special figure 1. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so all the LEDs on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are off and the number of hold in the special figure 1 is “0”. It is shown. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the variation icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon is displayed with an image of “爺” as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button press indication is displayed with an image imitating the chance button 136 together with the message “Press the button!”. In addition, a button reception period display image indicating a period during which the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image or when the button reception period elapses, as shown in FIG. Is displayed as a preview image to notify the result. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 44 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs variable display of the decoration symbol. Indicates the normal reach state. FIG. 44 (f) shows a state where the normal reach has evolved to the super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In this example, a super-reach image in which the samurai shouts out loud, “It ’s a game!” Is displayed.

  In FIG. 44 (g), the character “Win” is displayed when the warrior wins the game, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Shows the state.

  FIG. 44 (h) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration” in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, which have been reduced in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area and indicate a big hit. “7” indicates an enlarged and stopped display. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. In this way, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure variable game as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is performed.

  FIG. 45 shows an example of performance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45B illustrates an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45C illustrates a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45D illustrates a luminance setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 through the screens shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows an example of a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A large screen at the center of the display area is used as the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image in which a samurai on a horse is moving on a mountain road is displayed. Around the display area, for example, a special big hit image of the number “7” indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, an acquired ball number display image is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, “80 balls” is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, “1R” is displayed). In the lower right corner, a display image of the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts) is displayed (in this example, “number of jackpots: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 45 (f) illustrates a display screen during power support displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A special symbol variation game is performed in the electric support state, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region. In the electric support state, the player should make a right turn to allow many game balls to pass through the second general figure starting port 229 and to allow the special figure 2 starting port 232 to win many game balls. For this reason, with the variation display of the decorative symbol as a background display, the direction of launching by a clockwise arrow on the character string “Please strike right!” And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 A suggestion is displayed. Note that the fluctuation icon display area 803 displays a fluctuation icon based on the normal hold image shown in FIG. 2, and the special figure 2 hold display area includes one normal hold display h4.

  FIG. 45G illustrates a demonstration display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string “Dayo” is displayed. FIG. 45 (h) illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door opening error screen and a pan full error screen are displayed.

<Example of overlapping display area of display means with movable body>
Next, an example in which the display area of the display unit is overlapped (hidden) with a movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 will be described. However, the display means is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208, and a movable body is also used. It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  In addition, the display area that overlaps with the falling unfolding combination 730 is “a display area that extends over a part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a part of the special figure 1 holding number display area 801, and a part of the variable icon display area 803”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the decorative design display device 208 may be all of the display areas, or a plurality of display areas that are not continuous in the display area of the decorative design display device 208 (for example, Special Figure 2). The hold number display area a3 and the variable icon display area 803) may be used. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be overlapped by a part of members (for example, the support arm 733) constituting the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  FIG. 46A shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling unfolding accessory 730 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 43B. FIG. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a part of the normal hold display (black circle image) displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801, A part of the fluctuation icon display (black circle image) displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 803 is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46B shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling unfolding accessory 730 in the state where the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. It is a figure. In this example, a part of the decoration symbol (decoration 6) displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the prefetch hold display (character image of “爺”) displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are displayed. A part and a part of the fluctuation icon display (black circle image) displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 803 are overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. ing.

  FIG. 46 (c) shows a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 44 (c). It is the figure which showed the example which overlaps. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a part of the message “Press the button!” Displayed in the effect display area, and the effect display area are displayed. All of the displayed button press indications (images imitating the chance button 136), a part of the button reception period display image (meter display) displayed in the effect display area, and the variable icon display area 803 are displayed. A part of the fluctuation icon display (character image of “爺”) is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46D shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 when the player shown in FIG. 44D presses the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notice image (simulating Hinomaru) for announcing the result of the special figure 1 variation game displayed in the effect display area. A part of the image) and a part of the variation icon display (character image of “爺”) displayed in the variation icon display area 803 are the falling and unfolding combination executing the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped with the object 730.

  FIG. 46E is a diagram showing an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 in the normal reach state shown in FIG. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the variation icon display (character image of “爺”) displayed in the variation icon display area 803 are the first. It is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice by light emission of the light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46 (f) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling unfolding accessory 730 in a state where the normal reach shown in FIG. 44 (f) is developed to the super reach. FIG. In this example, a part of the super-reach image displayed in the effect display area (the image of the samurai screaming loudly saying “It ’s a game!”) Is executing a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by a drop deployment tool 730.

  FIG. 46 (g) is a diagram showing an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 in a state where the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 44 (g) is stopped and displayed. It is. In this example, a part of the result image of super reach displayed in the effect display area (image in which the character “win” is won and the warrior wins the game) is generated by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice.

  FIG. 46H shows a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” showing the big hit shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed the example which overlaps with the fall expansion | deployment combination 730. FIG. In this example, a part of the decoration symbol (decoration 7) displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and a part of the variable icon display area 803 are dropped while the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is being executed. It is overlapped by a deployment tool 730.

  FIG. 46 (i) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 in the state where the hitting display screen shown in FIG. 45 (e) is displayed. It is a figure. In this example, part of the hit display image (image where the samurai on the horse is moving on the mountain road) displayed in the effect display area and part of the display image of the big hit count (number of consecutive resorts) It is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46J illustrates an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling unfolding accessory 730 in the state where the display screen during power support shown in FIG. 45F is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the background display ("Right-handed!" Character string expanded in the effect display area) Part of the game ball launch direction suggestion display with a clockwise arrow) and part of the variation icon display (black circle image) displayed in the variation icon display area 803 are due to light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice.

  FIG. 46 (k) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling unfolding accessory 730 in the state where the demonstration display screen shown in FIG. 45 (g) is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the character string “Daito” displayed in the effect display area is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46 (l) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 in the state where the error display screen shown in FIG. 45 (h) is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the door opening error screen (character string of “door opening error”) displayed in the effect display area, and the dish full error A part of the screen (character string “dish full tank error”), a part of the normal hold display (black circle image) displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801, and the fluctuation icon display area 803 are displayed. A part of the displayed fluctuation icon display (black circle image) is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

<Example of overlapping a movable body with another movable body>
Next, an example in which the movable body is overlapped (hidden) with another movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, an example is described in which a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is overlapped by the launching accessory unit 800, but other movable bodies are not limited to the launching accessory unit 800 (other movable Needless to say, the movable body (which is overlapped by the body) is not limited to the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  Moreover, although the area | region which overlaps with the launching instrument unit 800 is made into "a part of fall deployment actor 730", this invention is not limited to this, For example, all the areas of the fall deployment actor 730 may be sufficient Further, it may be a plurality of regions that are not continuous in the region of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 (for example, the left side in the front view of the first structure 731 and the right side in the front view of the second structure 732). In addition, when the launching accessory unit 800 is composed of a plurality of members, it overlaps with one member of the plurality of members, but may be configured not to overlap with another member.

  FIG. 47A shows a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped by the drop and unfolding accessory 730 and a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the drop and unfolding accessory. It is the figure which showed the example which further overlaps a part of area | region of 730 with the launching accessory unit 800. FIG. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is overlapped by the falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing the advance notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. A part of the area of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing the advance notice by the light emission of the light emitting means 731 d is further overlapped by the launching accessory unit 800.

<Example of overlapping another movable body with a movable body>
Next, an example in which another movable body is overlapped (hidden) with the movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, an example in which a part of the launching accessory unit 800 is overlapped by the falling and deploying accessory 730 will be described. However, other movable bodies are not limited to the launching accessory unit 800 (other movable Needless to say, the movable body (which overlaps the body) is not limited to the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  Moreover, although the area | region which overlaps with the fall expansion | deployment winning combination 730 is made into "a part of launching action unit 800", this invention is not limited to this, For example, all the areas of the launching action unit 800 may be sufficient In addition, a plurality of regions that are not continuous in the region of the launching accessory unit 800 (for example, a part of the launching accessory unit 800 on the left side of the front view and a part of the right side of the front elevation view) may be used. Further, when the launching accessory unit 800 is configured by a plurality of members, one member of the plurality of members overlaps, but the other member may not be overlapped.

  FIG. 47B shows a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the launching accessory unit 800 and a part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the launching accessory unit. It is the figure which showed the example which further overlaps a part of area | region of 800 with the fall expansion | deployment combination 730. FIG. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c is overlapped by the launching accessory unit 800, and a part of the launching accessory unit 800 region is partly displayed. However, it is overlapped by a falling and unfolding accessory 730 that is executing a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

<Visibility mode of the dropped and unfolded accessory 730 at the initial position>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a visual aspect of the dropped and unfolded accessory 730 at the initial position will be described.

  FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example in which the drop deploying accessory 730 in the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735 having the opening 735a. In this example, a decoration means 735 having a rectangular opening 735a is provided in the upper part of the game board 200, and a falling and unfolding accessory 730 is arranged on the back side of the decoration means 735 so as to be movable up and down.

  The opening 735a of the decoration means 735 is a part of the first structure 731 and a part of the second structure 732 in the state in which the dropping and developing agent 730 is located at the initial position. Is designed in a material, size, shape and position that can be seen from the front. For this reason, a part of the area of the dropping and developing agent 730 in the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735, while the other part of the area of the dropping and developing agent 730 is overlapped by the decoration means 735. Without being visible from the front through the opening 735a. It should be noted that the opening 735a of the decoration means 735 has a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 of the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 in a state where the dropping and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the initial position. The size, shape, and position may be such that only one of them is visible from the front. Further, the size of one viewable region of a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 may be different from the size of the other viewable region.

  FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an example in which the drop deploying accessory 730 in the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736 having the notch 736a. In this example, a decoration means 736 having a notch 736a extending upward from the lower end is provided on the upper part of the game board 200, and a falling and unfolding accessory 730 is arranged on the back side of the decoration means 736 so as to be movable up and down. ing.

  The notch 736a of the decoration means 736 is formed so that a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 of the dropping and developing agent 730 are in the state where the dropping and developing agent 730 is located at the initial position. The material is designed to have a material, size, shape, and position that can be seen from the front. For this reason, a part of the area of the dropping and developing agent 730 in the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736, while the other part of the area of the dropping and developing agent 730 is overlapped by the decoration means 736. And is visible from the front through the notch 736a. The notch 736a of the decoration means 736 has a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 of the drop deploying agent 730 in a state where the drop deploying agent 730 is located at the initial position. The size, shape, and position may be such that only one of them can be viewed from the front. Further, the size of one viewable region of a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 may be different from the size of the other viewable region.

  FIG. 48 (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the drop-deployment combination 730 in the initial position is overlapped by the above-described center combination 900 (see FIG. 28 and the like). In this example, the falling and unfolding combination 730 is arranged on the back side of the center combination 900 so as to be movable up and down.

  In the center combination 900, the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 of the drop expansion combination 730 are partly viewed from the front in the state where the drop expansion combination 730 is located at the initial position. It is made up of a member that cannot be visually recognized (in this example, a member that is an opaque material and is larger than the falling and unfolding accessory 730). For this reason, all of the area of the drop unfolding accessory 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736. In addition, by configuring the center role 900 with a transmissive member (for example, a transmissive liquid crystal device, a magic mirror, an instantaneous light control glass, or the like), a part or all of the area of the drop deployment role 730 is visually recognized from the front. It may be possible. In this case, the size of one viewable region of a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 may be different from the size of the other viewable region.

<Modified example 2 of the falling and unfolding agent>
Next, a drop deploying agent 760 according to Modification 2 of the drop deploying agent 712 will be described.

<Fall deployment 760>
FIG. 49A is a front view and a side view of the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 located at the first operation position, and FIG. 49B is a falling and unfolding operation located at the second operation position. The front view and side view of the accessory 760 are the front view and side view of the drop deployment accessory 760 located at the third operating position.

  In each of the drawings (a) to (c), the figure shown on the left side toward the paper surface is a front view of the drop deployment accessory 760, and the figure shown on the right side toward the paper surface is a drop. FIG. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-rear direction of the dropping and developing agent 760, and the left side toward the paper surface is the forward direction of the dropping and developing agent 760 (in this example, the same as the front direction of the game table). The right side of the drawing is the rearward direction of the falling and unfolding accessory 760 (in this example, the same direction as the back direction of the game table).

<Structure of the fall deploying agent 760>
Next, the structure of the drop unfolding accessory 760 will be described. The drop deploying agent 760 includes a first structure 761, a second structure 762 having a different shape from the first structure 761, and a support arm 763 that rotatably supports the first structure 761. A first drive means (not shown) for rotationally driving the support arm 763, a support arm 764 for rotatably supporting the second structure 762, and a second drive for rotationally driving the support arm 764 And means (not shown).

  The first structure 761 includes a first base body 761a having a T-shape in side view, a first light emitting substrate 761b fixed to the first base body 761a, and the entire first light emitting substrate 761b. And a first cover 761c disposed so as to cover. A plurality of first light emitting means 761d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at a predetermined interval on one mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate 761b. The first cover 761c is made of a transparent or translucent member and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting means 761d.

  The second structure 762 includes a C-shaped second base body 762a, a second light emitting substrate 762b fixed to the second base body 762a, and a tip of the second light emitting substrate 762b. And a second cover 762c disposed so as to cover the part. A plurality of second light emitting means 762d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at predetermined intervals on one mounting surface at the tip of the second light emitting substrate 762b. The second cover 762c is made of a transparent or translucent member and can transmit light emitted from the second light emitting means 762d.

  The first and second structures 761 and 762 are separate from each other in the falling and unfolding combination 760. The first structure 761 can be rotated by rotating the support arm 763, and the support arm 764 can be rotated. The second structure body 762 can be rotated by driving and rotating. Note that one of the first structure body 761 and the second structure body 762 may be fixed (unmovable).

  In this example, the number of the first light emitting means 761d (LED) is larger than the number of the second light emitting means 762d (LED). Thereby, the production mode by the 1st base body 761 and the production mode by the 2nd base body 762 can be varied, and the production effect of a game stand can be heightened. The number of the first light emitting means 761d (LED) and the number of the second light emitting means 762d (LED) may be the same.

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 760>
Next, the operation of the drop unfolding accessory 760 will be described. The dropping and unfolding accessory 760 rotates the support arm 763 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral B in FIG. 49A) by a driving means (for example, a driving motor) (not shown). The first structure 731 is rotatable, and the support arm 764 is rotated in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by reference numeral B in FIG. 49A) by a driving means (for example, a driving motor) (not shown). Thus, the second structure 762 can be rotated. In addition, the rotation direction of the drop unfolding accessory 760 is not limited to this example, and instead of (or in addition to) the predetermined direction, the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, (B in FIG. 49A) May be rotatable in a counterclockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by.

<Operation of the drop unfolding member 760 / first operation position (initial operation position)>
The state shown in FIG. 49A is a state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 is located at the first operation position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “initial operation position”). In the first operation position, the first structure 761 is positioned in front of the second structure 762. For this reason, as shown in the front view of FIG. 49 (a), a part of the second structure 762 is overlapped with a part of the first structure 761 (the second structure 762). A part of the second structure 762 is not overlapped with the first structure 761 (the other part of the second structure 762 is not visible). In a state where it can be seen from the front. Further, in this state, the first light emitting unit 761d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting unit 761d can be executed.

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 760 / second operation position>
Subsequently, when the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 is located at the first operation position, the support arm 763 is rotated 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral B in FIG. 49A). The falling unfolding accessory 760 rotates to the second operating position shown in FIG. In this second operating position, the position of the front end 762e of the second structure 762 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end 761e of the first structure 761 in the front-rear direction. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the midway process in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 rotates from the first operating position to the second operating position, the position of the front end 762e of the second structure 762 in the front-rear direction is There is a state in which the front end 761e of the first structure 761 is in the same position as the position in the front-rear direction. In this state, the second light emitting means 762d can emit light, and an effect or a notice can be executed by the light emission of the second light emitting means 762d.

<Operation of the falling unfolding member 760 / third operation position>
Subsequently, when the falling and unfolding accessory 760 is positioned at the second operation position, the support arm 763 is rotated 180 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral B in FIG. 49A). The falling and unfolding accessory 760 rotates to the third operating position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 762 is positioned in front of the first structure 761. Therefore, in the second structure 762, the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 is located at the third operating position is more than the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 760 is located at the first operating position. It becomes easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position of the front end portion 762f of the second structure 762 in the front-rear direction is a front position compared to the position of the front end portion 761f of the first structure 731 in the front-rear direction. In this state, a part of the first structure 761 is overlapped with a part of the second structure 762 (a part of the first structure 761 is not visible from the front). However, the other part of the first structure 761 is not overlapped with the second structure 762 (the other part of the first structure 761 is visible from the front). In this state, the second light emitting means 762d can emit light, and an effect or a notice can be executed by the light emission of the second light emitting means 762d.

<Variation 3 of the falling and unfolding accessory>
Next, a falling and unfolding accessory 770 according to Modification 3 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 will be described.

<Fall deployment 770>
FIG. 50 (a) is a front view and a side view of the dropping and unfolding accessory 770 located at the first operating position, and FIG. 50 (b) is a dropping and unfolding located at the second operating position. The front view and side view of the accessory 770 are a front view and a side view of the drop deployment accessory 770 located at the third operating position.

  In each of the drawings (a) to (c), the figure shown on the left side toward the paper surface is a front view of the drop deployment accessory 770, and the figure shown on the right side toward the paper surface is a drop. FIG. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-rear direction of the falling and unfolding accessory 770, and the left side toward the paper surface is the front direction of the falling and unfolding agent 770 (in this example, the same as the front direction of the game table). The right side of the drawing is the rearward direction of the falling and unfolding accessory 770 (in this example, the same direction as the back direction of the game table).

<Structure of the falling unfolding member 770>
Next, the structure of the drop unfolding accessory 770 will be described. The dropping and unfolding accessory 770 includes a first structure 771, a second structure 772 having a shape different from that of the first structure 771, and driving means (not shown) for rotationally driving the first structure 771. ) And.

  The first structure 761 includes a first base body 771a having an annular drive wheel 771g, a first light emitting substrate 771b fixed to the first base body 771a, and the first light emitting substrate 771b. And a first cover 771c disposed so as to cover the whole. A plurality of first light emitting means 771d (LEDs in this example) are disposed at a predetermined interval on the mounting surface on one side of the first light emitting substrate 771b. The first cover 771c is made of a transparent or translucent member and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting unit 771d.

  The second structure 762 is a chain-like member in which a plurality of annular members are connected in a daisy chain. One end of the second structure 762 is wound around the drive wheel 771g of the first structure 771 and is hung in the vertical direction by its own weight. ing.

<Operation of the falling and unfolding accessory 770>
Next, the operation of the drop unfolding accessory 770 will be described. The dropping and unfolding accessory 770 has a first structure by rotating the driving wheel 771 in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral C in FIG. 50A) by a driving means (for example, a driving motor) (not shown). The rotation direction of the drop-deployment accessory 770 that can rotate the body 771 is not limited to this example, and instead of (or in addition to) the predetermined direction, the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, (FIG. 50 (A) may be rotatable in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by C.

<Operation of the drop unfolding member 770 / first operation position (initial operation position)>
The state shown in FIG. 50A is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 770 is located at the first operation position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “initial operation position”). In the first operating position, the first structure 771 is positioned in front of the second structure 772. Therefore, as shown in the front view of FIG. 50A, a part of the second structural body 772 is overlapped with a part of the first structural body 771 (of the second structural body 772). A part of the second structure 772 is not overlapped with the first structure 771 (a part of the second structure 772 is not visible from the front). In a state where it can be seen from the front. Further, in this state, the first light emitting means 771d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 771d can be executed.

<Operation of Falling Deployment Tool 770 / Second Operational Position>
Subsequently, when the falling and unfolding accessory 770 is positioned at the first operating position, the drive wheel 771g is rotated 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (a clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral C in FIG. 50A). Then, the drop unfolding accessory 770 rotates to the second operation position shown in FIG. In this state, all of the second structure bodies 772 are not overlapped with the first structure body 771 (a state where all of the second structure bodies 772 are visible from the front).

<Operation of Falling Deployment Tool 770 / Third Operation Position>
Subsequently, when the falling and unfolding accessory 770 is located at the second operating position, the drive wheel 771g is rotated 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by C in FIG. 50A). Then, the drop unfolding accessory 770 rotates to the third operation position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 772 is located in front of the first structure 771. Therefore, the second structure 772 is more in the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 770 is located in the third operating position than in the state in which the dropping and unfolding accessory 770 is located in the first operating position. It becomes easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position of the front end 772f of the second structure 772 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end 771f of the first structure 771 in the front-rear direction. In this state, a part of the first structure 771 is overlapped with a part of the second structure 772 (a part of the first structure 771 is not visible from the front). However, the other part of the first structure 771 is not overlapped with the second structure 772 (the other part of the first structure 771 is visible from the front). In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the midway process in which the falling and unfolding accessory 770 rotates from the second operation position to the third operation position, the position of the front end portion 772f of the second structure 772 in the front-rear direction is There is a state in which the front end 771e of the first structure 771 has the same position as the position in the front-rear direction.

<Operation example of other actors>
Next, the operation example of another accessory is demonstrated using FIG. 51 and FIG.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 1 of accessory 820>
51 (a-1) to 51 (a-5) are diagrams showing an operation example 1 of the accessory 820 in time series. The accessory 820 moves the first structure 821 having a rectangular shape in front view, the second structure 822 and the third structure 823 having a fan shape in front view, and the first structure 821 in the vertical direction. A first driving means (not shown) capable of rotating, a second driving means (not shown) capable of rotating the second structure 822 counterclockwise, and a third structure 823. And third drive means (not shown) that can be rotated clockwise. The first structure 821 includes a first light emitting unit 821d (LED), the second structure 822 includes a second light emitting unit 822d (LED), and the third structure 823 includes a third light emitting unit 821d (LED). The light emitting means 823d (LED) is provided.

  The second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are disposed on the front side of the first structure body 821 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the first structure body 821. The second structure 822 is urged clockwise (in the direction of the third structure 823) by an elastic body (not shown) (for example, a spring or rubber), and is driven by a second driving unit (not shown). In a free state that is not performed, a part of the region of the first structure 821 (in this example, the region in the lower left of the front view) overlaps (one of the regions in the lower left of the first structure 821 in the front view). Part is not visible from the front).

  The third structural body 823 is urged counterclockwise (in the direction of the second structural body 822) by an elastic body (for example, a spring or rubber) (not shown), and is connected to third driving means (not shown). In a free state that is not driven, a part of the region of the first structure 821 (in this example, the region at the lower right of the front view) overlaps (the region at the lower right of the first structure 821 in the lower right direction). A part of the region is not visible from the front).

  The state shown in FIG. 51 (a-1) is a state in which the accessory 820 is located at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned above the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display region of the symbol display device 208 is from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). In addition, the second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are biased by the elastic body and overlap a part of the region of the first structure body 821 (in the region of the first structure body 821). A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-2), the first structure 821 is lowered by the driving of the first driving means, so that the accessory 820 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 from the initial position. This is the state after descending. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is the front surface). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are biased by the elastic body and overlap a part of the region of the first structure body 821 (in the region of the first structure body 821). A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-3), the second structure 822 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise by the driving of the second driving means, and the third structure is driven by the driving of the third driving means. This is a state after the body 823 has rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is the front surface). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are in a state where a part of the area of the first structure body 821 overlaps (a part of the area of the first structure body 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front. And a part of the display area of the symbol display device 208 overlaps the display area of the symbol display device 208 (a part of the display area of the symbol display device 208 cannot be seen from the front). State).

  In this state, the first structure 821 performs an effect by the first light emitting means 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 executes an effect by the second light emitting means 822d (LED). And the 3rd structure 823 performs the production | presentation by the 3rd light emission means 823d (LED).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-4), the second structure 822 rotates 90 degrees clockwise by returning the driving of the second driving means to return to the initial position. This is a state after the third structure 823 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise by returning to drive and returns to the initial position, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. In this state, the first structure 821 finishes the effect by the first light emitting means 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 finishes the effect by the second light emitting means 822d (LED). And the 3rd structure 823 complete | finishes the production | presentation by the 3rd light emission means 823d (LED).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (a-5) is a state in which the accessory 820 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-1). In addition, in this example, although the example which performs the effect by a light emission means (LED) at the timing shown to FIG. 51 (a-3) was shown, you may perform the said effect in another state. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), etc. You may go.

<Operation example of other accessory / operation example 2 of accessory 820>
51 (b-1) to 51 (b-5) are diagrams showing an operation example 2 of the accessory 820 in time series. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the operation | movement same as the operation example 1 shown to FIG. 51 (a-1)-the same figure (a-5).

  The state shown in FIG. 51 (b-2) is a state after the second structure 822 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise by the driving of the second driving means at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned above the symbol display device 208, so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (all the display areas of the symbol display device 208 are from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). In addition, the second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are in a state where a part of the area of the first structure body 821 overlaps (a part of the area of the first structure body 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front. However, the region overlapping with the second structure 822 is smaller than the region overlapping with the third structure 823. In this state, the second structure 822 may execute an effect by the second light emitting means 822d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (b-3) is a state after the third structure 823 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise by the driving of the third driving means in the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned above the symbol display device 208, so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (all the display areas of the symbol display device 208 are from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). In addition, the second structure body 822 and the third structure body 823 are in a state where a part of the area of the first structure body 821 overlaps (a part of the area of the first structure body 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front. The region overlapped by the second structure body 822 and the region overlapped by the third structure body 823 are the same. In this state, the third structure 823 may execute an effect by the third light emitting means 823d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (b-4), in the initial position, the first structure 821 performs an effect by the first light emitting means 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 The light emitting unit 822d (LED) produces an effect, and the third structure 823 is in a state where the third light emitting unit 823d (LED) produces an effect.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (b-5) is a state in which the accessory 820 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51 (b-1). In addition, in this example, although the example which performs the effect by a light emission means (LED) was shown in the timing shown in FIG.51 (b-4), you may perform the said effect in another state. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), etc. You may go.

<Operation example of other accessory / operation example 3 of accessory 820>
51 (c-1) to 51 (c-3) are diagrams showing an operation example 3 of the accessory 820 in time series. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the operation | movement same as the operation example 1 shown to FIG. 51 (a-1)-the same figure (a-5).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c-1), in the initial position, the first structure 821 performs an effect by the first light emitting means 821 d (LED), and the second structure 822 is The second light emitting means 822d (LED) produces an effect, and the third structure 823 executes the third light emitting means 823d (LED). Note that in this example, the first structure 821, the second structure 822, and the third structure 823 are all executed simultaneously by the light emitting means (LED). The start timing of the effect may be shifted, or at least one effect may not be performed. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), etc. You may go.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 1 of accessory 830>
52 (a-1) to 52 (a-5) are diagrams showing an operation example 1 of the accessory 830 in time series. The accessory 830 moves the first structure 831 having a rectangular shape in front view, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 having a fan shape in front view, and the first structure 831 in the vertical direction. The first driving means (not shown) capable of moving, the second driving means (not shown) capable of moving the second structure 832 in the vertical direction, and the third structure 833 up and down And third drive means (not shown) that can be moved in the direction. The first structure 831 includes a first light emitting unit 831d (LED), the second structure 832 includes a second light emitting unit 832d (LED), and the third structure 833 includes a third light emitting unit 831d (LED). The light emitting means 833d (LED) is provided.

  The second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are disposed on the front side of the first structure body 831 so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first structure body 831. The second structure 832 can be raised or lowered by the second driving means (not shown), but in the free state where the excitation by the second driving means (not shown) is interrupted, the second structure 832 is lowered by its own weight. 52A, as shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), a part of the region of the first structure 831 (in this example, the region on the lower left in front view) is overlapped (the first structure 831). A part of the lower left area of the front view of the camera is not visible from the front).

  The third structure 833 can be raised or lowered by third driving means (not shown), but in a free state where excitation by the third driving means (not shown) is cut off, the third structure 833 is lowered by its own weight. 52A, as shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), a part of the region of the first structure 831 (in this example, the region at the lower right of the front view) is overlapped (the first structure) 831 is a state in which a part of the lower right region of the front view is not visible from the front).

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (a-1) is a state in which the accessory 830 is located at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display region of the symbol display device 208 is from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). In addition, the second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are biased by the elastic body and overlap a part of the region of the first structure body 831 (in the region of the first structure body 831). A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (a-2) is that the first structure 831 is lowered by the driving of the first driving means, so that the accessory 830 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 from the initial position. This is the state after descending. In this state, the first structure 831 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208, and thus overlaps the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is in front). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are biased by the elastic body and overlap a part of the region of the first structure body 831 (in the region of the first structure body 831). A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (a-3) is after the second structure 832 has been raised by the drive of the second drive means and the third structure 833 has been raised by the drive of the third drive means. State. In this state, the first structure 831 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208, and thus overlaps the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is in front). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized. Further, the second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are in a state where a part of the region of the first structure body 831 overlaps (a part of the region of the first structure body 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front. And a part of the display area of the symbol display device 208 overlaps the display area of the symbol display device 208 (a part of the display area of the symbol display device 208 cannot be seen from the front). State).

  In this state, the first structure 831 performs an effect by the first light emitting unit 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 performs an effect by the second light emitting unit 832d (LED). And the 3rd structure 833 performs the production | presentation by the 3rd light emission means 833d (LED).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (a-4) is that the second structure 832 freely falls by the release of excitation of the second drive means and returns to the initial position, and the second structure 832 is released by the release of excitation of the third drive means. This is the state after the third structural body 833 has fallen free and returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. Further, in this state, the first structure 831 ends the effect by the first light emitting means 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 ends the effect by the second light emitting means 832d (LED). And the 3rd structure 833 complete | finishes the production | presentation by the 3rd light emission means 833d (LED).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (a-5) is a state in which the accessory 830 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 52 (a-1). In addition, in this example, although the example which performs the effect by a light emission means (LED) at the timing shown to FIG. 52 (a-3) was shown, you may perform the said effect in another state. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), etc. You may go.

<Operation example of other accessory / operation example 2 of accessory 830>
52 (b-1) to 52 (b-5) are diagrams showing an operation example 2 of the accessory 830 in time series. Note that the description of the same operation as the operation example 1 shown in FIGS. 52A-1 to 52A-5 is omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (b-2) is a state after the second structure 832 is raised by the driving of the second driving means at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display region of the symbol display device 208 is from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). Further, the second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are in a state where a part of the region of the first structure body 831 overlaps (a part of the region of the first structure body 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front. However, the region overlapping with the second structure 832 is smaller than the region overlapping with the third structure 833. In this state, the second structure 832 may execute an effect by the second light emitting means 832d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (b-3) is a state after the third structure 833 is lifted by the driving of the third driving means at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display region of the symbol display device 208 is from the front). It is a state that can be visually recognized). Further, the second structure body 832 and the third structure body 833 are in a state where a part of the region of the first structure body 831 overlaps (a part of the region of the first structure body 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front. The region overlapping with the second structure 832 and the region overlapping with the third structure 833 are the same. In this state, the third structure 833 may execute an effect by the third light emitting means 833d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 52 (b-4), in the initial position, the first structure 831 performs an effect by the first light emitting means 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 has the second structure 832. The light emitting means 832d (LED) produces an effect, and the third structure 833 is in a state where the third light emitting means 833d (LED) produces an effect.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (b-5) is a state where the accessory 830 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 52 (b-1). In addition, in this example, although the example which performs the effect by a light emission means (LED) at the timing shown in FIG.52 (b-4) was shown, you may perform the said effect in another state. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), etc. You may go.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 53 (a) or FIG. 51, the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51), and the second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 53 (a) or the second structure shown in FIG. 40). A game machine equipped with a structure 732 and a second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51, in a first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. In the state where the object 730 is located at the first operating position shown in FIG. 40A), a part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, and the first In one state, the other part of the second structure is not overlapped with the first structure, and the second state (example For example, the second state shown in FIG. 53 (a), or the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b) or the third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c). The front end of the second structure (for example, the front end 732e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end 732f shown in FIG. 40C) in the front-rear direction is Compared with the position in the front-rear direction of the front end portion (for example, the front end portion 731e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end portion 731f shown in FIG. 40C) of the structure of FIG. In the second structure, in at least one of the first state and the second state, an effect (for example, an effect by the second light emitting means 732d (LED), a light effect as a reach effect, a jackpot effect) As a flash production, as a bonus production It is a game machine characterized by being a structure that can execute effects, effects for exciting benefits such as RT and AT, effects that suggest the pressing order of stop buttons, and gasses effects (false effects) .

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. There is a case. In addition, since the second structure performs an effect in at least one of a plurality of states, the player's interest may be further improved.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to this example is the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b) or the first structure shown in FIG. 51, the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51), the second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b), the second structure 732 shown in FIG. , A second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51, and a first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. 40 (a) in the first operating position), a part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, and in the first state, , Another part of the second structure is not overlapped with the first structure, and the second state (for example, FIG. 53 ( In the second state shown in FIG. 4), or in the state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is located at the second operation position shown in FIG. 40B or the third operation position shown in FIG. The position of the front end of the second structure (for example, the front end 732e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end 732f shown in FIG. 40C) in the front-rear direction is the front end of the first structure. (For example, the front end portion 731e shown in FIG. 40 (b) or the front end portion 731f shown in FIG. 40 (c)) is the same or the front position, and the second structure is In at least one of the first state and the second state, a notice (for example, a notice by the second light emitting unit 732d (LED), a light emission effect as a notice, an issue effect as a pre-reading notice) is executed. It is a possible structure It is a skill base.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. There is a case. In addition, since the second structure performs the notice in at least one of a plurality of states, the player's interest may be further improved.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to this example is the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 53 (a) or the first structure shown in FIG. 40). 51, the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51), the second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 53A, the second structure 732 shown in FIG. , The second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51, and a first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the first operation position shown in FIG. 4B), a part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, In the first state, another part of the second structure is not overlapped with the first structure, and the second state (for example, 53 (a), or the second unfolding action 730 is shown in FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 41 (c) in the second operating position, and FIGS. 40 (c) and 41 (d). In the third operating position shown in FIG. 4), the front end of the second structure (for example, the front end 732e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end 732f shown in FIG. 40C). ) In the front-rear direction compared to the position in the front-rear direction of the front end portion of the first structure (for example, the front end portion 731e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end portion 731f shown in FIG. 40C). Thus, the second structure can execute the initial operation (for example, the initial operation 1/3 to 3/3 shown in FIG. 53C or the initial operation shown in FIG. 41). The second structure is in the first state during the initial operation period. Kicking located position in said second state and position, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. There is a case. Further, since the second structure is located at the position in the first state and the position in the second state in the initial operation, it may be easy to confirm the operation of the initial operation.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to this example is the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) or the first structure shown in FIG. 51). Structure 821), a second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 54A or the second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51), and a third structure (for example, FIG. 54). A game machine including the structure 3 shown in FIG. 5A and the third structure 823 shown in FIG. 51, in a first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. 54A) ), A part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, and in the first state, another part of the second structure is the first structure. In the second state (for example, the second state shown in FIG. 54A) without overlapping the structure, the front end of the second structure The position in the front-rear direction is the same or the front position compared to the position in the front-rear direction of the front end portion of the first structure, and the position of the third structure is the position in the first state. There is a case where the position is the same as the position in the second state.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. There is a case. In addition, since the change in the position of the second structure can be seen with reference to the position of the third structure, the degree of change in the second structure can be emphasized, and the player's interest is further improved. There is a case that can be made.

  The second structure may be easier to see in the second state than in the first state. The second structure includes light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 732d (LED) shown in FIG. 40, dot matrix display device, 7 segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display). Apparatus, leaf display device, plasma display, projector). Further, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41) is provided, and the second structure is configured to display the display means in at least one of the first state and the second state. The structure located ahead may be sufficient. Also, the first drive means (for example, a drive motor for moving the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51 in the vertical direction) is provided, and the first drive means is the first structure (for example, FIG. The first structure 821) shown in FIG. 51 may be at least driven. Moreover, the second drive means (for example, a drive motor for rotating the second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51) is provided, and the second drive means is the second structure (for example, shown in FIG. 51). It may be a means for driving at least the second structure 822). Further, at least one of the first structure and the second structure may be capable of rotating.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to this example is the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 54 (b) or the first structure shown in FIG. 51). Structure 821), the second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 54B, the second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51), and the first driving means (for example, FIG. 54). The motor 1 shown in (b), the drive motor that moves the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51 in the vertical direction, and the second drive means (for example, the motor 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b), FIG. 51). And a first driving means for driving the first structure (see FIG. 51 (for example, FIG. 51)). a-2) or a downward movement operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-2)), and the first driving means Means for causing the second structure to execute a second operation (for example, a rotation operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-3) or an upward movement operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-3)). The driving means is a means for causing the first structure to execute a third operation (for example, the upward movement operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-5) or FIG. 52 (a-5)). The driving means is a means for causing the second structure to execute a fourth operation (for example, a rotating operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-4), a dropping operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-4)), The game machine is characterized in that the second structure is a structure capable of producing an effect.

  According to the game stand according to this example, it is possible to perform a novel effect and improve the interest of the player.

  The display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 51 and 52) is provided, and the first structure is a structure that may be located in front of the display device. The second structure may be a structure that may be located in front of the display means. Further, the first structure has a first light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting means 821d (LED) shown in FIG. 51 and a first light emitting means 831d (LED) shown in FIG. 52). It may be a body. The second structure has a structure having second light emitting means (for example, second light emitting means 822d (LED) shown in FIG. 51 or second light emitting means 832d (LED) shown in FIG. 52). It may be a body. The fourth operation may be a dropping operation of the second structure (for example, a dropping operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-4)). The fourth operation is an operation in which the second structure operates without depending on the driving force of the second driving means (for example, a dropping operation due to the weight of the second structure). Also good. Further, the fourth operation by the second structure may be restricted when the second driving means is not driven. Further, the first operation is an operation in which the first structure moves away from a first initial position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 51A-1 or FIG. 52A-1) (for example, 51 (a-2) and FIG. 52 (a-2)), the second operation is the second initial position of the second structure (for example, 51 (a-2) and the initial position shown in FIG. 52 (a-2) (for example, the rotation shown in FIG. 51 (a-3) and the rise shown in FIG. 52 (a-3). The third operation is an operation in which the first structure approaches the first initial position (for example, FIG. 51 (a-5) and FIG. 52 (a-5)). ), And the fourth operation is an operation in which the second structure approaches the second initial position (for example, 51 (a-4) rotating operation shown in, or may be an operation comprising dropping operation) shown in FIG. 52 (a-4).

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example has a structure (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) (for example, 28, and a movable body (e.g., a falling and unfolding role 712 shown in FIG. 28), wherein the movable body includes a first movable portion (e.g., 21 and 30 etc., and the movable body is a second movable part (for example, “third structure 712c” shown in FIG. 20, FIG. 30, etc.). ), And a part of the second movable part is in the first state (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 is the “initial position” shown in FIGS. 30 (a), 31 (a), etc.). In a state where the first movable part is over. In the first state, at least a part of the outer end portion of the first movable part is overlapped with the structure, and the other part of the second movable part is , In the first state, located outside the outer end portion, the other part is overlapped with the structure in the first state, the second movable portion, It is a movable part which may be located ahead of a 1st movable part, It is a game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, by performing a novel effect of positioning the second movable part of the movable body in front of the first movable part, it is possible to diversify the way the movable body is shown. In some cases, the production effect can be enhanced and the player's interest can be improved. Moreover, since the entire shape of the first movable part can be concealed by overlapping at least a part of the outer end part in the front view of the first movable part with the structure, the first movable part In some cases, the player can imagine the overall shape and movement, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, since the overall shape of the second movable part can be concealed by overlapping the other part of the second movable part with the structure, the overall shape and movement of the second movable part can be concealed. There are cases in which the player can imagine and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, the entire outer end portion of the first movable portion in the front view is in the second state (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is the “initial position shown in FIGS. 30A and 31A). ”To the“ intermediate position ”shown in FIG. 30B, FIG. 31B, etc.), the second movable part is overlapped with the structure body in the third state ( For example, in the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) or FIG. 34 (b)), the movable part is located in front of the first movable part, and the second state is passed after the first state. There may be a case of transition to the third state. In addition, the movable body is a movable body having a mechanism portion (for example, “the accessory support portion 704f” or “left rotation motor base 712e1” shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, etc.), and at least one of the mechanism portions. The part may be located below the lower end part of the first movable part.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example includes a first driving unit (for example, a driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, 23. A gaming machine equipped with a first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first rendering means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)). Second operation by driving the first driving means 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (c), for example, is a means capable of executing the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d ascending), and the second action by the second rendering means. In the meantime, the first operation by the first effect means is executed, and the first effect means is operated by driving the second drive means to activate a third action (for example, actuating a solenoid 758d1). The second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c is moved down), the first operation is different from the third operation, and the first operation is the first operation. Is the operation of moving from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C), The third operation is an operation in which the first rendering means moves to the first position. Yes, the second operation is such that the second rendering means moves from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). And the first effect means is a means capable of executing the first action by contacting the second effect means, and the first effect means. Is a means which can be located at a fifth position (for example, a position shown in FIG. 35 (d) where the lowering is blocked (locked) by the claw portion 758d3), and the fifth position is The first position is a position between the first position and the second position, the second position is a position higher than the first position, and the first presentation means is configured to A means capable of moving from a second position to the fifth position, wherein the first effect means is The second driving means is a means capable of moving from the fifth position to the first position by driving the second driving means, and the second driving means is configured such that the first rendering means descends from the fifth position. The solenoid which operates the nail | claw part which can prevent this may be sufficient.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, various effects can be provided, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Overall configuration>
Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at an amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor is provided for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 57) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, Chance button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 55, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
56 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 55 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing of the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 58) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, The launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control section 630 (see FIG. 58) that performs the control processing related to the above, and the power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 58) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are constructed. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.
FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 56), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 56 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 56 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 57 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 55, the decorative design display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative design display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specs of the gaming table is attached to the game board 200 at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received payball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls has been paid out, or paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, using FIGS. 59A to 59D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.59 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. In FIG. 59 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 59 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 59A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 59 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 59 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol pattern. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 59 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  58 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electric support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt, and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 56 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Also, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 56 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  A main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms). The main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 58 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a prize at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 58 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 59 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 59 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, a door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). Is output in a storage state of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in a prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 63A to 63C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 62, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 63 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 63A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 63 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 63B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 63B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 63B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, FIG. 64 is referred to for the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 64A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / failure determination probability table, and FIG. 64B is a diagram illustrating an example of the failure determination low probability table. In the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 64 (a), and in the case of the special figure low probability state. Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 64 (a). In this case, refer to the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 64C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 64C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 65A is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 65B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 65 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random value, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 65 (b), based on the result of the special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 66A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 66B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 66C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 66D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 67A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 67A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 67B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 67 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  68, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 68 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 68 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 68A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 68 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 68 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

In FIG. 68 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 68 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.
Then, in FIG. 68 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 68 (h), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 68 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P as shown in FIG. 68 (j). . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 68 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 68 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 68 (n). , Has developed into a super reach. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.
69 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 68 step by step.

  In FIG. 69 (p) continuing from FIG. 68 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 69 (s). In FIG. 69 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 69 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” determined to be the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.69 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 69 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 69 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in a different decorative pattern (substantially 5R probability big hit, 5R regular big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 68 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 69 (t). In 69 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 69 (v ′) following FIG. 69 (u ′), “decoration 6-decoration” is displayed. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 69 (w ′) following FIG. 69 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 69 (q) in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 70 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 68 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 70 (b). In FIG. 70 (b), the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 70 (c), as in FIG. 69 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 70 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of Special Fig. 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. Here, FIG. 71A is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 71B is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 72A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 72B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the notice icon first display area YA1, a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, a thousand carton box is displayed. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c), for example. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 71 (a) is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 71A) moves toward the change icon display area 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 71A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 71 (a) has started, a Tono-sama effect that increases the notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 72 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord are shown in the notice icon (preliminary notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear. And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 72 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), for example, the notice icon of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, the ribbon icon of the ribbon are shown in FIG. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura) In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation acceptance period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above changes to the notice icon after the change. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 72B: erasure effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  73, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the common figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 68. For example, the display result of the 4th symbol is displayed by the light emission mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 73 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variable symbol variation display. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  Further, in FIG. 73 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 73 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 73 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 73 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is framed out downward of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 step by step.

  In FIG. 74 (14) following FIG. 73 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 74 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0, and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  74. After the Tono-sama character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (17), the notification icon I6 of the hat he holds and the warning for the thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 73 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (20), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 74 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 74 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 74 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 74 (23), when two or more identical notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 74 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 74 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.
75 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 75 (28) continuing from FIG. 74 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watchdog character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol display area 208b displays a pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (30), and then “continue” with the Tono-sama character as shown in FIG. 75 (31). A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (34), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 75 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 75 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, in FIG. 75 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 75 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 76 (43) following FIG. 75 (42), the decoration symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (44), the above-described super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, has moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (45) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (46), the display in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 76 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 76 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 76 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 76 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 76 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (53), a character display of “striking” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (55), as shown in FIG. 76 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is deleted, It shows how the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 76 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 76 in stages.

  In FIG. 77 (58) following FIG. 76 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 77 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. In addition, when adding a character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 77 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 77 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-change effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 77 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 78 to 80, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 78 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 78 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (9 a-2), after the display of the first lord's notice icon I 1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is exploded, the timing shown in FIG. 78 (10 a). Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  78 (8b) to FIG. 78 (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 78 (8b), an effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9b). If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  78 (8c) to FIG. 78 (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to 73 (9). That is, in FIG. 78 (8 c), as in FIG. 73 (8), an effect display is performed in which the hat notice icon I 6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 78 (9c), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  FIGS. 78 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 78 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 73 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 78 (8d), not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 at the same time. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three hats thrown becomes the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (9d), the same notice icon (eg, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. Further, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (pre-stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 78 (9d ′), a part or all of the thrown three hat notice icons I6 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  78 (7e) to FIG. 78 (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 73 (7) to FIG. 73 (9). That is, in FIG. 78 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 78 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9e), three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notification icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notifications can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notifications can be enhanced. There is a case.

  In this case as well, as shown in FIG. 78 (9e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  78 (12f-1) to FIG. 78 (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (12). That is, in FIG. 78 (12 f-1), as in FIG. 73 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state where the hat notice icon I 6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 in the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (12f-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 79 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (8). That is, in FIG. 79 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of Tono-sama displays the notice icon I6 of the hat as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 79 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (8). That is, in FIG. 79 (8 h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the special icon 1 hold icon display area 281, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. This production hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 79 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  79 (8i) to FIG. 79 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 79 (8i), as in FIG. 73 (8), an effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 79 (9 i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I 6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (9 i-2), the preview icon I 6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the pre-reading notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (9i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 shown in FIG. 1, but holds it using the effect hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  79 (8j) to FIG. 79 (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 79 (8j) is different from FIG. 73 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 79 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and displays the hat's notice icon I6 held in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 79 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 73 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 79 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if In addition, as shown in FIG. 79 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in the carton box so that it is overlaid on the hat notice icon I6 that is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 79 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 79 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (12l ′) and FIG. 79 (12l ″), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are displayed as “question marks” to clearly indicate the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is decided is executed by a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a jackpot confirmation (or that there is something that will be a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of production described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM and DJ character BY. However, in the example of production shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 80 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 80 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the display is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 80 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 80 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first icon notification icon design imitating the first icon notification icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the example of production shown in FIG. 80 (B2), a character notation of “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (B3), the display of the first icon notification icon changes to the first icon notification icon I1 and moves to the notification icon first display area YA1 of the notification icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 80 (B4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, but may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 81 to FIG. 84 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon digest effects. 81 to 84, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  81 (38m) to FIG. 81 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 75 (38) to (40). In FIG. 81 (38m) to FIG. 81 (39m), the same effects as in FIG. 75 (38) to FIG. 39 (39) are performed, but in FIG. 81 (40m-1), the medium symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 81 (40m-2), the variable display becomes high speed immediately before the pseudo continuous symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol, and the pseudo continuous symbol appears. Is scrolled out to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 81 (40m-3), the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation of fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  81 (23n) to FIG. 81 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 74 (23) to FIG. 24 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 81 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  81 (23o) to FIG. 81 (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 81 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are not included without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 81 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  81 (22p) to FIG. 81 (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 74 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 81 (23p), the leftmost (notice icon) in the notice icon display area 285 There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 81 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the order in which the notice icons are digested. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  81 (24q-1) to FIG. 81 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 74 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 81 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  FIG. 82 (Aa) to FIG. 82 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 82 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand box is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 that has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 82 (B) shows an effect example in the case where the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area as a result of digesting a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 82 (C) shows an effect example in the case where the digest effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), while the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested is performed. An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 82 (59r) shows another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (59r), before the start of the effect of digesting the notice icon, the effect of inquiring whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of production shown in FIG. 82 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is erased without being digested, the display is stopped after the stop with the combination of the decorative symbols. You may alert | report.

  FIGS. 82 (59s) to 60s (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 77 (59) to (60). In other words, in FIG. 82 (59s), two notice icons I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, it will be a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 82 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, they will be lost. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  FIGS. 82 (23t) to 32 (t) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to 75 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (23t), in this effect example, in the notice icon display area 285, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digest notice icon is added. As shown in FIGS. 82 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 82 (28t) to 32 (t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digest notice notice icon display area YA0 continues to be displayed after digestion and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 76 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  83 (Aa) to 83 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 83 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the Princess Chibi character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner at the center of the display area, and then, in accordance with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 83 (66u-1) to FIG. 83 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 77 (66). That is, in FIG. 83 (66 u-1), the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 83 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used for, for example, a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for notifying that a certainty big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. 83 (66u) In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 83 (Ba) to FIG. 83 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and then the hold is digested and the symbol variation When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 83 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 83 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  83 (22v-1) to FIG. 83 (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 74 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 83 (22v-2), Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started in which the notice icon of the kind notified in advance (hat notice icon I6) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 83 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 74 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted, for example, so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is then displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in combination, and a combination notice may be executed when a plurality of characters appear correspondingly. In addition, a specific effect for digesting multiple notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit if multiple notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested The reliability may be high.

  Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, the figure change display is started. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter as shown in FIG. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. After that, at the timing of FIG. 84 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 digests is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 84 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 86 is a step by step continuing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 86, and FIG. 88 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 88 in stages.

  In FIGS. 85 (1) to 86 (14), the notice icon used for increasing the notice icon is changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. In addition, as for the effects performed between FIG. 86 (14) and FIG. 86 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon notice icon I1. 74 is the same as FIG. 74 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 86 (20), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the loss is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 86 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 86 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 86 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notification symbol in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. 86 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 86 (25), a character display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  86 (27) to 87 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. This is the same as FIGS. 74 (27) to 75 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (34), the display that the first icon of the first icon displayed in the second notification icon display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 87 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notification icon I 6.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (37), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  87 (38) to FIG. 45 (45), the notice icons I6 for digested hats are respectively displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, 75 (38) to 76 (76) except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (46), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a notice box icon I9 of a thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (47), and is further enlarged. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes is erased and the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (48). In addition, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 88 (49). In this example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 88 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display that a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 87 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the darkened background. The character “NO” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (50-2). Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (55), as shown in FIG. 88 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 88 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 88 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 88 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth display area YA4 of the notification icon is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (61) and is enlarged. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. In addition, when adding a character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 89 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 89 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 89 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 92 are diagrams showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon step by step. 90 to 92, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 90 (8a) to FIG. 90 (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 85 (8) to FIG. That is, in FIG. 90 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  90 (8b) to FIG. 90 (b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8b), as in FIG. 85 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 90 (9 b), it is shown that the first lord's notice icon I 1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 90 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I1 but also three first lord notice icons I1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown are notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is difficult to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (9c ′), a part or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative design You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 90 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (8). That is, in FIG. 90 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display form of the pre-read notice (display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the character uses the notice icon I1 of the first character as the notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 90 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (8). That is, in FIG. 90 (8f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1, but displays the hold number by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 90 (8 f), for the convenience of explanation, the second special figure 1 holding lamp to be prefetched is shown hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  90 (8g) to FIG. 90 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8g), as in FIG. 85 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 90 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the first lord's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (9g-2), the preview icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to pre-read the notice. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  90 (12h-1) to FIG. 90 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 85 (12). That is, in FIG. 90 (12h-1), as in FIG. 85 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (12h-2), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  91 (8i) to FIG. 91 (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 91 (8i) is different from FIG. 85 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8 i), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I 1 of the first lord. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (9 i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and displays the first icon of the first lord with the notice icon I 1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  91 (8j) to FIG. 91 (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to 85 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 85 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 91 (8j), a DJ with a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 91 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  91 (8k) to FIG. 91 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 85 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 91 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 91 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (121), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified by text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icons after the change, and the notice icon after the change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  92 (8m-1) to FIG. 92 (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to 85 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 85 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 92 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 92 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notification icon I9 of the Thousand Boxes is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notification icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  92 (8n-1) to FIG. 92 (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 85 (8) to FIG. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 85 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 92 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after overwriting is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes step by step. In FIG. 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 93 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 93 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the pre-reading notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but it is displayed in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the Princess Chibi chance effect. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character chooses one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 93 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 93 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  Further, when the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 93 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 93 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is interrupted or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power is interrupted / restored while the notice icon is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 94 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 94 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94C, a character display “Please wait for a while during recovery” is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 in stages. 95 to 96, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, in FIG. 95, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 95 (1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 73 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. This is different from FIG. 73 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display region is formed above the reserved icon display region 281 and a three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 73 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (4). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 95 (7) to (8), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (9), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 95 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is circled.

Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIG. 95 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIGS. 95 (7) to (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 95 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (19) following FIG. 95 (18), the notice icon I21 and the notice icon of “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. Display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “mon” move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Since the contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70, description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  97 and 98 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 97 to 98, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 97 (a1) differs from FIG. 95 (5) in that the “mon” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 97 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be enlarged and displayed in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 97 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 97 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.
FIG. 97 (b1) to FIG. 97 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 97 (b3), The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged, and the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (b5), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest actor 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 97 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The crest dropping effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In addition, in FIG. 97 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  97 (c1) to FIG. 97 (c2-3) show other examples of the effect of digesting the notice icon. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 97 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of “Tono” notice icon I31, “Princess” notice icon I32, and “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  In FIG. 97 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for "Tono", the notice icon I32 for "Princess", and the notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", the notice icon I32 for "Princess" The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen, and the face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “Tono” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  In FIG. 97 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “の” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with a face of a frog is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, although this example of an example demonstrated the example in which all three notice icons were displayed, only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a samurai character may appear and the Tono & Samurai Reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 98, there is a case where an effect may be given for each when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “mon” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (d3), the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. Also, as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1−chance symbol−decoration 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM succeeds in drawing the “print” notice icon I22, the family crest member 224B falls as shown in FIG. 98 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the drawing of the “print” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the pull-in notification icon I22 of the “print” is successfully pulled. Also, as shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the drawing of the “mon” notification icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 98 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested, for example, “House” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and an increase effect and a digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 99, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 99 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is a target of the prefetching notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). The hold icon h11) is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows how various parts are given. In FIG. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e1) shows a state in which the unscrupulous merchant character EC is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position, the timing display shown in FIG. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-like character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 95 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 99 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan-Sullet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display form of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 99 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 99 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 99 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, and may be mounted when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 99 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 4, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach and attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a variation of the digest effect in stages, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 100 in stages. 100 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 100, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 100 to 101 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 100 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (3), the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses is shown in the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled. For example, the first decorative design display device The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 100 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which Tono-sama's character YM has succeeded in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect production may be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 100 (7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 100 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 100 (10), the first notification icon first display icon 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (12). Is done. It should be noted that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 100 (11) is displayed in the first decoration symbol display at the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 101 (13) continuing from FIG. 100 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 101 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B provides a notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  Thereafter, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which the Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 101 (16), it is not necessary for the long-length character BC2 to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display across” is displayed in cooperation with the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed that moves downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (19). Thereafter, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, another modification example of the increase effect and digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 104 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 102 to 104, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  102 (a1) to FIG. 102 (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 100 to 101, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 99, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 102 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. The notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 102 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (a4), after the hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a5-1), the variation display of FIG. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 102 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (a5-2), even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a5-2), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is a result of the loss. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 102 (a6-2) shows a state in which the two pending holds are consumed and the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 102 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  102 (b1) to FIG. 102 (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the number of notice icon displays is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of two 7-segments, for example, and can display the number of notice icons displayed (stock number).

  102 (b1) to FIG. 102 (b3) are the contents of the effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 74 (17) to (19). A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. In other words, in FIG. 102 (b1), since only one hat icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays "01" indicating the number. Yes. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (b2), Tono-sama character YM throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, and fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (b4), when the hat's notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. For example, the operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (a first decorative symbol display device 208C and a second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 100 to 101. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. In FIG. 103, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 103 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is put on hold. The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. FIG. 103 (c1) At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c1), the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 103 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 103 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 for the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c3), since the number of holdings is one, in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1, “1” indicating that fact is displayed.

  FIG. 103 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 103 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 103 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. When the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the long-length character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 103 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 103 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (d), the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively display the notice icon I6 for the hat, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 104 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 104, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 104 (e1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 76 (47), which covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. In other words, in FIG. 104 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and a notice is given to make a transition to a more reliable production. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move toward each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decorative effect as shown in FIG. 76 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 104 (e7), the “decoration 1-decoration 2—over the second ornamental symbol display device 208I and the third ornamental symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (e11-1), the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has fluctuated and fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the fourth notice icon display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 104 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 104 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  104 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 104 (e3) to FIG. 104 (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also performs these operations. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 104 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. 105, the transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 105, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is subjected to a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6 and arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 105, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 105, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is a default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 99, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 105 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-1). At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. That is, in FIG. 105 (f2-1), the stock icon of the notice icon is displayed by dark display and light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be terminated after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the Chanletlet display area 287 is a notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides it. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to emit light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 105 (g) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 105 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 105 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 105 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of symbols is performed in the Chanletlet display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 105 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 105 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 106 (1) to FIG. 11 (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 of the drink instead of the notice icon I10 of the fan. 76 (44) to FIG. 76 (54), only the parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 76, and the description of the common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 106 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 106 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (14), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 106 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 106 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 106 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  107 (a1) to (a3), when stocking the notice icon, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 107 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 95 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

FIG. 107 (a2) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to a visually recognizable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visually recognizable position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 107 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 107 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate about the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  107 (c1) to 107 (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode has been entered. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 107 (c1) shows a state where the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the prefetching mode is started, as shown in FIG. 107 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display “Preparing for special training” on the right side in the belt-like scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 107 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 107 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is ended, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that the special training reach is started is performed. Further, the effect movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, and then, as shown in FIG. 107 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 108, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  Since FIG. 108 (1) is the same display as FIG. 95 (1) described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this production example, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (3), but the hat notification icon I6 possessed by the hat has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 108 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. As shown in FIG. 108 (5), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 held is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 108 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 108 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 108 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 108 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. The notice icon digestion effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 109, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  109 (a1) to 109 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after the effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 109 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display section 288 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), when a strike is obtained in a bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that the notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 109 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike was taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 109 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it was stocked. In this way, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 109, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 109 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 109 (b), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 109 (c), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game concerning the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 110, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 110 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, has been suspended. This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-1), a savohani character SB is placed at any one of the start points of three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the character moves up to the next vertical line. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 110 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 109 (c) and (d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the starting point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. , At the timing shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), it reaches the middle of the middle horizontal line.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the savohani character SB follows the rule of Amida lottery from the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 110 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating the acquisition is performed, the AMIDA effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 110 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is placed at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. An effect as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3) is a kind of a premier effect that rarely appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-4), the hat icon IX is not arranged, the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 110 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player hits the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-6), the notice icons of the patrons whose types of notice icons are not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, the first icon 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is a notice icon for the red lord, is more likely to be changed to a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is confirmed than a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is not confirmed, and the white lord The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 110 (a2-2), during the execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then the area shown in FIG. 110 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX is changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the production is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the hat warning icon I6 or the fan warning icon I10 has been suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan warning icon I10 is stocked.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut in the middle, the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 110 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 110 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of an effect of increasing the notice icon increase effect. is there. In FIG. 111, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 111, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch advance notice display mode (sabohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 111 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, in FIG. 111 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 111 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (6), on the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 111 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (15), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (16), the hold icon that is moved and displayed by the moving animation and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 111 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notification symbol is displayed in the first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 112, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 112 (a1) to FIG. 112 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is given in advance to notify that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 112 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 112 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold is in the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown at 112 (a3-1), a hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described production example, the notice icon is always stocked by displaying the placard PL1, but for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 112 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no effect relating to the stock of the notice icon is performed as shown in FIG. 112 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  112 (b1) to 112 (b3) show a state in which a prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b1), the game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, and the prefetching notice is given as the display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 112 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, a ton-like effect or the like is performed and a notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

  112 (d1) to 112 (d3) show a state in which the stock and digestion of the notice icon are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, as shown in FIG. 112 (d2), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon. The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 112 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 (e1) to (e2), the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 113, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIGS. 113 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which a preview icon display area and an area for displaying a stage name for explaining background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. Yes. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice and the description of the appearance character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 113 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the hat notice icon I6 that appears due to the Tono-sama production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  FIG. 113 (c1) to FIG. 113 (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  FIG. 113 (d1) to FIG. 113 (d3) show other examples of the notice icon increase effect.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size so as to overlap the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (d2), the reduced-size hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 113 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  FIG. 113 (f1) to FIG. 113 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  FIG. 113 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 113 (d1) and will not be described in detail.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 113 (g1) to FIG. 113 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that produces the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 72 (b). Which notice icon is included? It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.
Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment step by step, and FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table related to the notice item. It is.

  FIG. 114 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 114 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have a holding number of zero. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 114 (b) shows a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 114 (e) is reached, an advance notice icon It and a princess advance notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has been increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so that the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (h). The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (i), the display is stopped with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (j), after the suspended symbol fluctuation display of Special Figure 1 is started, Tono-sama's notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 114 (j), the notice icon Id of the bad actor is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih and the villain notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  At the timing of FIG. 114 (m), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays “decoration 3” in the right symbol display area 208c, and then stops and displays “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed in conjunction with the start of the symbol variation display in FIG. An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50 Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  In addition, when the result of jackpot determination executed when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started is out of place, when the symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit is held as a result of the prefetching of holding in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50. Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of special figure 1 , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 127.

  116 to 127 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 116 to 127, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 116 to 127 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 116 to 127, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 116 to 126 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 117 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 116 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are given. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 116 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 116 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. In addition, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) having a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon having a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation are used. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (f), the state where the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (g). At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the bomb icon I61 that bursts changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (j), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1, while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 116 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the Tono-sama character. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 116 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display related to the notice icon and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (l), in the first decorative design display device 208L, the first decorative design is the decorative design of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 116 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is a master of the lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 is set. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 116 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (p), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging, and an expectation is expressed as to whether or not the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (a) following FIG. 116 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 117 (c) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 117 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 117 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (h), the main character Tono-sama was defeated by the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 117 (i), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing another example of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 in a stepwise manner. It is. 118A to 118 are the same as FIGS. 116A to 116, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 118 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 118 (n), a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is arranged (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 118 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 118 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (a) following FIG. 118 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 119 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 119 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 119 (g), duel animation continues, and when the timing shown in FIG. 119 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the state that the swinging-up chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward and is digested is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 119 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the cut-in display that is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the main character, Tono-sama won the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. (N), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 120, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to perform an effect display that conveys the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 120 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR as will be described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “The swordsman is the nemesis of Tono-sama”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or before the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman maintains the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing shown in FIG. 120 (a6) shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 120 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b1) to FIG. 120 (b8), another example of the notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 120 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 pops out from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to an enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing shown in FIG. 120 (b6) shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 120 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b8), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol table while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 120, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 121, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame at normal time, and when the explanation display is performed, a state in which the frame is entered from below is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 121 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 121 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 121 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (e) to (j), FIG. 121 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 121 (a10). The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation display “Due to digestion of notice icon ...”, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 121 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman notice icon I62 The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. Since FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. 121 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIG. 116 (p) to FIG.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Ton-sama is an 8th general” is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 122 (a1). In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that “the gold is hotter than red”, and an explanation about the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative design, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 122 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a2), the balloon TT2 is erased together with the little girl's character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating “the swordsman reach is hot”, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a6), the state where the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda is intruded”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect is made. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. Note that the timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon part TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon part TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 122 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  122 (c1) to 122 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. Note that, at the timing of FIG. 122 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of performing explanation display about the production. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 122 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 123 shows a state in which the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrated. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 123 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a2), a third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and, as shown in FIG. 123 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 116 (e) to (k) and described above.

  FIG. 123 (a5) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character ruptures, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to the princess's notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. At the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the predetermined display position (stock position) is not reached. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. In the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 118), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (a6), when the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 123 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed respectively by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 123 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and then the tutorial display section. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 123 (a9), when the princess's notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one to display the tutorial. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed in the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed in the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this production example, the example shown in FIG. 116 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 123 (b1) to FIG. 123 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in a variable display.

Thereafter, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 122 (b2). In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing stepwise other example effects according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 124 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 124 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  124A1 to 124A3 show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 124 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by Fig.116 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 124 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. In other words, the UI part in the space stage has a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and a hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage shown in FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 124 (a3) shows a state immediately after moving from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is deleted when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 124 (b1), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. For example, the number of times that a button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 125 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  125 (a1) to 125 (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a1), “Tono is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 125 (a1), a hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a3), the state where the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the Hatena notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the Hatena notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Also, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a6), what is displayed as “with notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  125 (b1) to 125 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 125 (b1) is the same as FIG. 125 (a4), and FIG. 125 (b3) is the same as FIG. 125 (a6); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 125 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 125 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 125 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the Hatena ’s notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. Accordingly, at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 125 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIGS. 125 (c1) to 125 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 125 (c1) is the same as FIG. 125 (b1), and FIG. 125 (c2) is the same as FIG. 125 (b2); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c2), as shown in FIG. 125 (c3), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new notice icon.

  125 (d1) to 125 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 125 (d1) is the same as FIG. 125 (a4), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 125 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 125 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 that is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 125, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a3) are the same as FIG. 116 (h) to FIG. 116 (j), and description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 126 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 126 (a4). As shown in FIG. 126 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1—decoration C—decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a6) to (a7), a notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. In addition, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at predetermined intervals. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap with the achievement display part KM1 by the notice icon may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 126 (b1) to FIG. 126 (b3), for example, an example of operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to super reach or a big hit is shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 126 (b1) shows a state where super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in a direction close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated with each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 126 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  126 (c1) to FIG. 126 (c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 126 (c1) shows a state in which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 126 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 117 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  FIG. 126 (c2) shows that the duel scene animation continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c3), as shown in FIG. 126 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 126 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-announce notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for advancement is an icon for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  127 (a1) to FIG. 127 (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In addition, the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 127 is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 127 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tonosama” part is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a4) is reached, the entire text “Swordsman is Tono-sama's enemy” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tonosama” area is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” part is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “I am the enemy” part is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that, when scrolling the explanation display is repeatedly performed, these periods are also repeatedly generated.

  127 (b1) to FIG. 127 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scrolling display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 127 (b1) to FIG. 127 (b3) and FIG. 127 (b6) to FIG. 127 (b7) are respectively shown in FIG. 127 (a1) to FIG. 127 (a3) and FIG. 127 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 127 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 127 (b4) to 127 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 127 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 127 (b7) is reached, the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  127 (c1) to FIG. 127 (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 127 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 that is a notice icon that is scheduled to be digested first and a swordsman notice icon I62 that is a notice icon that is scheduled to be digested second are a notice icon I63 that is a chance up. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 127 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. Thus, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],

  Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with

The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,

  The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]

The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]

  The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,

During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. The image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

  In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,

  The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]

After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holdings,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.
According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

  “Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],

The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 73 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;

The hold display is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 73 (4). The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 82C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

  In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

  In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]

  One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 76 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 88 (49), etc.]

One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,

  One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]

One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]

A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,

  The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And

The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,

  The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]

  The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],

During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

  In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect,

  The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.

After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is not necessarily displayed after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]

One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,

The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  “Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],

The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 73 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;

The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. 73. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. Further, the display according to the number of holdings may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 82C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

  In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same Good.

  In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]

  One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 76 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 88 (49), etc.]

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

  One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]

One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,

  The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,

The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.
In the above description,

“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;

A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,

  The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And

The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,

  The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],

  The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,

  In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,

The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2)”). It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design variation display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, the second display means may include a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big win] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,

  The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.

After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, and the like]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]

One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,

The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,

The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (9) to 74 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;

The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. 73. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol change display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 73 (1). As shown in FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display subject to prefetching. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. 82C is being executed during the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]

  As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes shown in FIGS. 76 (47) and 87 (47)] can be displayed.

  As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 83 (Ab)] can be displayed.

  The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,

  One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 76 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 88 (49), etc.]

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

  The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,

  The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,

  One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]

One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,

  The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,

The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],

Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,

  The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,

  The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]

The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,

  During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on hold held before the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]

  The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 73 (9) to 74]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (14). ],

The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2)” The first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 73 ( 9) to 74 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching as shown in FIG. 74 (23). Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 73 (9) to FIG. As shown in Fig. 74 (25), the symbol change that is the target of prefetching is such that the hat notice icon I6 that has started display at the timing shown in Fig. 73 (9) is digested at the timing shown in Fig. 74 (23). For example, a hat warning icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,

The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,

When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIG. 75 (28) to FIG. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.,

  When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,

  The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,

The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 72 (b), etc.]

  A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.

When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (1), a decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 73 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display means,

The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]

The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],

A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,

The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 95 (1), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 96, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,

  When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to 75 (32) When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIG. 76 (46) to FIG. May start, etc.]

The first combination of the displayed warning icons [for example, the combination of the “home” warning icon I21 and the “mon” ”warning icon I22 shown in FIG. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 96 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

  “The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,

The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 95 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 96 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 74] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, the “design variation display that is subject to prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), which is lost ”). The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 73). As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), such as a symbol variation display that is lost]” is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

“The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“First display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103],

Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.];
A game machine equipped with

  The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display in which the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 100 (10) to 101 (13) is digested, or FIGS. 101 (16) to (19). ) Shown in FIG. 103 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to 103 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,

  The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 100 (2) to FIG. 101 (13) or the figure shown in FIG. 100 (5) to FIG. The display of the notification icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or the display of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 103 (c6)].

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 72 may function as a prefetch notice display],

Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 103 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to (c9), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension to be read ahead shown in FIG. 103 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 103 (c1) to FIG. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103]. There is a case where a display for giving a notice is made [For example, as shown in FIGS. 100 (2) to (5), a notice for giving a notice that the notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

  In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. Means provided,

  The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. Means,

The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

  In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. Means provided,

  The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. Means,

  The notice icon is an icon [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons corresponding to the types of effects shown in FIG. 72] displayed in a display mode according to the type,

When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 101 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which 208 is displayed over the screen, and the number BC character pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, the “design variation display that is subject to prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), which is lost ”). The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 73). As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), such as a symbol variation display that is lost]” is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];

First movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 106 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

  Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66) and FIG. 106, in the period from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]

  The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 106 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,

When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. The first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 72, the notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,

The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 106 (12)] to the second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 106 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

  In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2)],

  The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2)],

Of the displayed notice icons, a sixth notice icon [e.g., "Home" notice icon I21 etc.] is digested, and the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may necessarily execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, the “design variation display that is subject to prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), which is lost ”). The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 73). As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), such as a symbol variation display that is lost]” is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 106 (the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.) Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

  Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 108 (1), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]

  One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 108 (2) to FIG. ],

The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension to be read ahead shown in FIG. 108 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66), it is an object of prefetching. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9, and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 108 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 110 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the hat's notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, the “design variation display that is subject to prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), which is lost ”). The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 73). As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), such as a symbol variation display that is lost]” is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (such as the hat notice icon I6) shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,

  Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 111 (2), etc.]] ”) Is suspended, the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,

  A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (4) to 77 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching. etc],

The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from when the first symbol variation display starts to display until the second symbol variation display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, As shown in FIGS. 73 (4) to 77 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the big hit that is the target of prefetching is suspended is started. By the time the symbol variation display that is a big hit is finished, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 111 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 111 (2)] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

  In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetch display form [for example, the prefetch notice display form (savohani display form shown in FIG. 111 (2)], etc.] May be

In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. 111 (2 ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third pre-reading notice display [for example, an effect display in the pre-reading mode shown in FIG. 112 (b2) to FIG. 112 (b3)],

The third look-ahead notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is put on hold [for example, shown in FIG. 112 (b1) to FIG. 112 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

  In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 111 (2) ”). The display is called symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)]”). ) May start,

  In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 73 (4) to 77 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.

The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66), such as a symbol variation display that is lost]” is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]

  The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 126 (d), etc.]

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.

  The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 116 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.

  The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 123] in the display means,

When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, No explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 123 (a7), displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 122 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,

  The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]

  One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 120, etc.]

  The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 120 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman notices. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 123],

  The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 117 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]

  The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)] in the display means,

The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. 2 pseudo-announce notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,

“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]

  The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 126 (d), etc.]

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 123] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123. A display area different from a display area [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.

  The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 116 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.

  The first display is a display that is displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 123 (a9), displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 122 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,

  The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 122 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,

  The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,

The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 122 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the second display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

  In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 123],

  The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display part ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), and a stage name display part ST1 shown in FIG. 117 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]

  The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,

The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,

In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.
Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]

  One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 120, etc.]

  The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 120 (a2) to (a4) and a swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.]” ,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

  Further, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative design display device 208, etc.]

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 123 (a9), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance-up notice icon I63, etc. are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG. 1 being suspended, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.
Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.
According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.
In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

  (Supplementary note 1) A game machine comprising image display means, symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display, and notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices, wherein the image display means is a holding display. The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons, and the hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means, The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being suspended (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”), and the symbol variation display is performed when the on-hold is digested. The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means, the notice icon is an icon different from the hold display, and the notice The icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, the notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed, and the notice means is displayed in the notice icon display area. When the one notice icon is digested, it is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, and the period during which the symbol variation display is executed once In this case, the second number larger than the first number is more likely to be a big hit than the first number of the plurality of types of notification icons. It is comprised as follows, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (Additional remark 2) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1, Comprising: The said notice icon is comprised so that the number according to the frequency | count that the said notice may be performed is displayed. To play.

  (Additional remark 3) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1 or 2, Comprising: The said notice means is a means which can perform the fake notice of the same aspect as the said notice aspect, The said notice means displays the said notice icon display When one of the notice icons displayed in the area is digested, the means is capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon, and the fake notice is executed. A gaming table, characterized in that the result of the symbol variation display is later deviated.

(Additional remark 4) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1 thru | or 3, Comprising: The said notice icon started to display in the said notice icon display area in the period when the said 1 time symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed A gaming table, wherein the fourth number larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit than the third number.

  (Additional remark 5) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 1 thru | or 4, Comprising: The holding | maintenance display means which can perform the display according to the said holding | maintenance number is provided, The said holding | maintenance display means is the said image display means, Is a different display means.

  (Additional remark 6) It is a game stand of Additional remark 5, Comprising: The said holding | maintenance display means is a display means containing a light emission means, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (Supplementary note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 6, further comprising prefetching notice means capable of executing a prefetching notice, wherein the prefetching notice means displays the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A game stand, characterized in that the game stand is a means capable of executing the pre-reading notice by displaying.

  (Additional remark 8) It is a game stand of Additional remark 7, Comprising: In the period when the said symbol fluctuation | variation display (henceforth a "2nd symbol fluctuation | variation display") used as the object of prefetch is performed, the said warning icon is displayed. There is a case where a fifth number is consumed, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may be digested in a sixth period, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, and the hold display indicates the first symbol variation A game machine characterized by being a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the display is being executed.

(Additional remark 9) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1 thru | or 8, Comprising: The said symbol fluctuation display (henceforth "4th symbol fluctuation display") by which the said notice icon is digested is performed. The game table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period of time.
(Appendix 10)

  The gaming machine according to attachment 9, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. In the game period, the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed.

(Additional remark 11) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 1 thru | or 10, Comprising: The said holding | maintenance display area is an area | region which can display the said holding display to a 7th number, The said notice icon display area is , An area where the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number, and the seventh number is different from the eighth number.
It is characterized by that.

  (Additional remark 12) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1 thru | or 11, Comprising: The production | presentation means which can perform multiple types of production is provided, One of the said multiple types of notices is 1st A first notice is a second notice, the first notice is a notice different from the second notice, and the plurality of kinds of notices One is the first production,

  One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is an effect different from the second effect,

  The first notice is a notice for informing that the first effect is executed, and the second notice is a notice for notifying that the second effect is executed. A characteristic game stand.

  (Supplementary note 13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 12, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail. To play. (Additional remark 14) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1 thru | or 13, Comprising: The said game stand is a pachinko machine, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. (Supplementary Note 15) A game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and during the display of the first symbol variation display In some cases, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon, and the first notice icon started during the display of the first figure change display is the first sign change display. In the symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”), the first symbol variation display A gaming table, characterized in that the first notice icon that has not been digested during display may be digested. (Additional remark 16) It is a game stand of Additional remark 15, Comprising: Said 1st notice icon started during the display of said 1st symbol fluctuation display is digested during the display of this 1st symbol fluctuation display A game table characterized in that it may be played. (Supplementary note 17) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 15 or 16, wherein the first notice icon is displayed while the first symbol fluctuation display is being displayed as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol fluctuation display. A game table characterized by that. (Additional remark 18) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 17, Comprising: During the display of one symbol fluctuation display, from the case where the first number of said 1st notice icons are digested However, when the second number of the first notice icons are digested, the game is characterized in that the second number is more likely to be a big hit and the second number is larger than the first number. Stand.

  (Additional remark 19) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 18, Comprising: It is comprised so that a 2nd notice icon can be displayed as the said notice icon, and said 2nd notice icon was digested A game table that is configured to be a big hit with symbol variation display. (Supplementary note 20) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 19, wherein one of the plurality of types of indication is a notice display, and the first notice icon is digested In addition, there may be a case where a first notice display is displayed as the notice display.

  (Supplementary note 21) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 20, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display, and when the first notice icon is digested, the fake notice The first false notice display may be displayed as the notice display, and the display form of the first false notice display is the same as the display form of the first notice display, and the first false notice display is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be out of place in the symbol variation display on which the notice display is displayed. (Additional remark 22) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 21, Comprising: One of the said multiple types of displays is a pre-reading production | presentation display, A 3rd notice icon is mentioned as said notice icon A gaming machine configured to be displayable, wherein the pre-reading effect display may be started when the third notice icon is digested. (Additional remark 23) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 22, Comprising: The said display means is a means comprised by the several display means, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. (Supplementary note 24) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 23, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display. (Additional remark 25) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 24, Comprising: Said 1st notice icon started display during display of said 1st symbol fluctuation display is said 2nd symbol A game table that is configured to be digested by the end of display of the variable display. (Supplementary note 26) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 25, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means, and the notice icon display area is A game table characterized in that it is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. (Additional remark 27) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 15 thru | or 26, Comprising: An effect control means is provided, The said effect control means is a means which can perform control of the said display means, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. A game table.

  (Supplementary note 28) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 27, comprising main control means and symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means. , A game stand characterized by that. (Supplementary note 29) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine. (Supplementary Note 30) A gaming machine comprising first display means capable of executing symbol variation display and second display means, wherein the second display means is capable of displaying a notice icon. The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display, and the second display means is the number of operations for which the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as “hold”). The display according to the number is displayed in the hold display area, the symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is consumed, and the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations depending on the number displayed, and the notice icon display area is the reservation display area. Unlike The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed, and the second display means digests the notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon, and the notice icon is first digested during a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once. It is configured so that the second number larger than the first number is more likely to be a big hit than the first number, and the second display means displays the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target. (Hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before starting. Game table for the butterflies. (Additional remark 31) It is a game stand as described in additional remark 30, Comprising: The said notice icon is comprised so that the number according to the frequency | count that the said notice display may be displayed is displayed. A game stand.

  (Supplementary note 32) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 30 or 31, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. The display means is capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. And the game table is configured such that after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is lost. (Supplementary note 33) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means. .

  (Supplementary note 34) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 33, wherein one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means, and one display means of the plurality of display means is on hold Display means, wherein the hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area, and the hold display means is capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area. The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, and the hold display The game machine is characterized in that the means is a display means different from the image display means. (Additional remark 35) It is a game stand of Additional remark 34, Comprising: The said holding | maintenance display means is a display means containing a light emission means, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. (Additional remark 36) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 30 thru | or 32, Comprising: Said 2nd display means is an image display means, The said image display means is a variable display of a decoration symbol. Is a display means that can display a hold icon in the hold display area in accordance with the number of holds.

  (Additional remark 37) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 30 thru | or 36, Comprising: In the period when said 2nd symbol change display is performed, the said notice icon may be digested 5th. In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed. The sixth number may be digested, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, and the display according to the holding number is executed by the first symbol variation display. A game table characterized by being a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a certain period. (Supplementary note 38) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. A game table that is configured to be digested without fail. (Supplementary Note 39) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 38, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed. The game table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period of time. (Additional remark 40) It is a game stand of Additional remark 39, Comprising: In the period when the said symbol variation display performed before performing the said 4th symbol variation display is performed, this 4th symbol The game table, wherein the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the variable display is executed may start to be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 41) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40, wherein the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the number of holds up to a seventh number. An icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number. (Additional remark 42) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 30 thru | or 41, Comprising: The production | presentation means which can perform several types of effects is comprised, and it can display a 1st notice icon as said notice icon The second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon, and the first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon, and the plurality of kinds of notice icons One of the notice displays is a first notice display, one of the plurality of kinds of notice displays is a second notice display, and the first notice display is the second notice display. This is a notice display different from the notice display, and is configured such that when the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed, and the second notice icon is digested. And the second notice is displayed. One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect, one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect Is an effect different from the second effect, the first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed, and the second notice display is the A game stand characterized by being a notice display informing that the second performance is executed.

  (Supplementary note 43) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42, comprising a main control means and an effect control means, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means. And the presentation control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means. (Supplementary note 44) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 45) A game machine including display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is indicated by a notice icon. Yes, the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display, and the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching is pending. , When a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are digested between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. But The display of one type of the plurality of types of display may be an effect display, and when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon May be displayed, one of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon, and one of the plurality of notice icons is As a second notice icon, a first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested in a single symbol variation display as the effect display. A first effect display is configured to be displayed, the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon, and the first number of notice icons is the Second plan A notice icon includes an icon, the amusement machine, characterized in that. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation. In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched. Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons. Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed. In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 46) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 45, wherein a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "second number of notice icons") is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display is not displayed, the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the second number of notice icons are the first number The notice icon includes one of the notice icon and the second notice icon, and the second number of notice icons includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon. A game stand characterized by being a notice icon that does not include the other notice icon. According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority. Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested. Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same. Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail. In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased. (Supplementary note 47) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 45 or 46, wherein one of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon, and the third notice icon is digested. The game stand is configured to display a third effect display as the effect display. According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced. Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  (Supplementary Note 48) The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 47, in which a lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) that is a target of prefetching is pending. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.

A game stand characterized by that. According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends. In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different. In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different. In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss. In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  (Supplementary note 49) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 48, wherein when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. The game table, wherein the plurality of notice icons may be displayed until the game ends. According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends. (Supplementary note 50) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 45 to 49, further comprising a hold display unit, wherein the hold display unit is a number of symbols whose display start is suspended (hereinafter referred to as "hold"). Is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to “number”).

A game stand characterized by that. The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means. (Additional remark 51) It is a game stand of additional remark 50, Comprising: It is comprised so that the said number of pending | holdings may not be displayed by the number by which the said notice icon is displayed.

A game stand characterized by that. According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect regardless of the number of holds. (Supplementary Note 52) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

A game stand characterized by that. (Additional remark 53) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 45 thru | or 51, Comprising: The said game stand is a slot machine, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (Supplementary Note 54) A game machine having a plurality of display means, wherein one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means, and one display of the plurality of display means The means is second display means, the first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and the second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. The one type of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon, and the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means. One type of display is a display related to the notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display. Hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display” ) Is suspended, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. .), And when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments. In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested. Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small. (Supplementary note 55) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 54, wherein the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed on the second display means.

A game stand characterized by that. One notice icon may be newly displayed. Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means. (Additional remark 56) It is a game stand of Additional remark 54 or 55, Comprising: The said 1st display means may perform the display which suggests that the said notice icon may be displayed,

A game stand characterized by that. Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display. (Supplementary note 57) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is a means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is , A means provided with a second display area, the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,

A game stand characterized by that. (Supplementary note 58) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is a means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is The second display area is provided, and an effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that. (Supplementary Note 59) Display means, movable means,

The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and the notice icon is , An icon that may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display, and when the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”), which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, the first symbol A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the change display and the end of the second symbol change display. When the symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. Case Yes, when the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed. As the notice icon digest effect, An effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.

A game stand characterized by that. The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed. (Supplementary note 60) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 59, wherein when the twenty-first notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed. ing,

A game stand characterized by that. In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed. In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation). Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed. (Supplementary note 61) The game stand according to supplementary note 59 or 60, wherein when the twenty-two notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed. ing,

A game stand characterized by that. In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

  (Additional remark 62) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 59 thru | or 61, Comprising: An operation means is provided, The said movable means is the said operation means, What is said 1st movable means production | presentation? The aspect of the operation means is an effect that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.

A game stand characterized by that. Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Supplementary note 63) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 59 to 62, comprising a second movable means, wherein the movable means is the first movable means, and the notice icon digestion As an effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  (Additional remark 64) It is a game machine provided with the display means, Comprising: The said display means is a means which can display a multiple types of display, The display of one type of the said multiple types of display is a notice icon. Yes, the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display, and the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching is pending. When a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are digested between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. But The display of one type of the plurality of types of display may be a notice icon increase suggestion display, and the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with the notice icon. The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

A game stand characterized by that. Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail. Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  (Supplementary note 65) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64, wherein the notice icon increase suggestion display is ended in the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.

A game stand characterized by that. Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

  (Additional remark 66) It is a game stand of Additional remark 64 or 65, Comprising: The icon of one of the eleventh numbers of the previous notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed as the notice icon. May be

A game stand characterized by that. The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase. Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase. The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased. Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased. (Supplementary note 67) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein the eleventh number of the notice icons of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display, May be displayed as the notice icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 68) A game machine including display means and hold display means, wherein the hold display means is capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds. Is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-read notice display. In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) that is the object of prefetching is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be consumed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. The second hold When the first symbol variation display is started, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 69) It is a game stand of Additional remark 68, Comprising: Said 2nd holding | maintenance display is a display which may be displayed in a prefetch display aspect, The symbol fluctuation display by which said 2nd holding | maintenance display was displayed In, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 70) It is a game stand as described in additional remark 68 or 69, Comprising: The hold display (henceforth "fourth symbol variation display") which is the object of prefetching (henceforth "fourth symbol variation display"). "Pending display") is displayed, and the plurality of notice icons are digested between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. There is,
A game stand characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note 71) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, the notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon, and the display means includes a plurality of display means. It is a means capable of displaying types of display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display. The second display is an explanatory display, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed, and the second display is displayed. Is a display displayed in the second display area, and the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed. is there,

A game stand characterized by that. The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display. Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen. In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the animation display position in the middle. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap. Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed. Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time. Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area. (Supplementary note 72) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 71, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  (Additional remark 73) It is a game stand of Additional remark 71 or 72, Comprising: Said 1st display is a display of a fluctuation icon, The said description display is an explanatory display regarding the said notice icon, The said notice icon is the said In some cases, it is displayed in an overlapped manner with at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”). When the notice icon is digested, the first of the second display is displayed. The overlap to the part is eliminated,

A game stand characterized by that. According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested. Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion. Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display. The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target. Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Supplementary Note 74) The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, wherein the display of the second display may be started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 75) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, in the state where the notice icon is displayed, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 76) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 75, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is a notice And when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 77) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 76, wherein the second display region is a region partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 78) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 77, wherein the "notice icon is displayed in the second display area more than the first display area when displayed." `` It is an icon displayed in a display area close to the display area '' means that `` if the notice icon is displayed, it is displayed in the second display area. ''
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 79) In the game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 78, the symbol variation display that is a big hit has more number of the notice icons digested than the symbol variation display that is lost. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 80) It is a game machine provided with the display means, The said display means is a means which can display the description display of a notice icon, The said notice icon is an icon different from a holding icon, The said multiple types One of the explanation displays is a first explanation display, the first explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon, and the notice icon is displayed as a pre-read notice display. There are more icons, the number of notice icons is digested more in the big hit variation than the loss variation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 81) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 80, wherein the notice icon is displayed in a display area in which the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display area”). There is an icon
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 82) It is a game stand of Additional remark 81, Comprising: In the state in which the said notice icon is displayed on said 1st display area, said 1st explanatory display is displayed on this 1st explanatory display area Not
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 83) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 80 thru | or 82, Comprising: One description display of the said multiple types of description display is a 2nd description display, Said 2nd description The display is a display indicating the current stage, and the notice icon may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”) in which the second explanation display is displayed. Icon
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 84) It is a game stand of Additional remark 83, Comprising: Even if it is in the state where the above-mentioned notice icon is displayed on the 2nd above-mentioned display field, an effect stage changes
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 85) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 80 to 84, wherein the display means includes a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icons. One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon, and one of the plurality of kinds of notice icons is a second notice icon. The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect, and the second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 86) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display, The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first display. The first display is an explanation display, the first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means, and the notice icon is displayed when the display is performed. An icon displayed in one display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 87) It is a game stand of additional remark 86, Comprising: In the state in which the said notice icon is displayed, said 1st display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 88) It is a game stand of Additional remark 87, Comprising: When the said notice icon is digested, the display of said 1st display may restart,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 89) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88, wherein one display among the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is a notice The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed, and the explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 90) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 86 thru | or 89, Comprising: The said display means is a means comprised by the several display means, and one of the said several display means is The first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, one of the plurality of display means is a third display means, The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display, and the third display means is the second display means. The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 91) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 86 thru | or 90, Comprising: One display of the said multiple types of displays is a 3rd display, and said 3rd display is description. The third display is a display that is displayed in a second display area of the display means, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  (Supplementary note 92) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 91, wherein the third display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.

A game stand characterized by that. In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means. The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change. In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation. The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

  It should be noted that the term “notice icon” described so far is named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

<Overall configuration>
Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 130). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 130) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 131) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 128 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 that are launched into the game area 124 of the game, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 130) by the player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 128 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 129 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 128 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. Pays out a ball to the person

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.
FIG. 130 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 130 is a so-called right-handed game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided with two variable winning holes. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of performing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmission portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, a family crest character 247 (see FIG. 141, etc.) not shown here and a pair of combined characters 248 (see FIG. 149, etc.) to be combined with the family crest character 247 are prepared. The family crest character 247 corresponds to an example of a first effect movable body, and the combined character 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The family crest character 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When the operation starts, the family crest member 247 falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined objects 248 are disposed at the initial positions on the left side and the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the combined object 248 starts its operation, the left and right are advanced from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the family crest character 247 from the left and right, and merge with the crest character. Whether it is a family crest character 247 or a pair of combined characters 248, it is less visible to the player in the state of being in their initial positions than when overlapping with the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 that detects the operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Data is read out and displayed using the work area of VRAM 436. And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 performs drive control of various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a family crest accessory 247, and a combined accessory 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518. Furthermore, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 131, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 131, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 132A to 132C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 132 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 132 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 132 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbols change at a high speed for each symbol display area (scrolled). When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 130B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 132 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 132 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  131 is stored in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 131 for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt, and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer numbers for special drawings and for universal maps, and these counters determine timer numbers that can take values ranging from 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 131 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, when the detection signal is stored twice after no detection signal, it is determined that there is a winning. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 131 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 131, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 133 (b)), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again using the same / non-defective determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 132 (a) is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 132 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure here is also a result of preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 133B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). The pre-determination based on the start information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified (pre-reading notice). By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 (b), a normal-related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as the common figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 132 (c)) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general display B shown in FIG. 132 (c) is obtained. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 (b), a special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the short time number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative symbol variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the decoration pattern fluctuation pattern in the decoration symbol display device 208. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 130) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating information, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command displays a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image that informs the player that the big hit is to be ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the big win game Ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. 131 is driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 133 (a). Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is stored in each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving the operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313, and the movable body control is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 according to the effect data read here. The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control processing here, various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 that can perform advancing and retreating operations, transmissive portions 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, family crests 247, combined roles are obtained from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of each of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 136, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following drawings unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136, a variation icon display region 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 208f is located to the right of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during the period other than the execution of the animation (for example, the period during which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (b), a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that.

  Further, FIG. 136 shows a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  In addition, FIG. 136 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 136, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lit” is used here, it may be “flashing” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 136 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the loss (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 136 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding indications of the special Fig. 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 136 (b), the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 136 (b) are lit, and the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3). The star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (c), a reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 136 (d), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 128 and the operation (pressing down) of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. 3) of an arrow display 136b and a “press” character display as a prompt display for prompting the user), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 136 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 136 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice that suggests whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. Yes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (h), the character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. The display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 136 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 136 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 136 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “decoration” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter FIG. As shown in (h ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” without developing into super reach. Has been. Even if “unfortunate” is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control for accepting only the acceptance period may be performed.
* D3046P

  FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128.

  A pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the transmission part 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 137 (b), it can vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmitting portion 191 shown in FIG. 137 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 137 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 137 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

However, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.
The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 138 (c) is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 is “movable”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 and the like. The LED and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as “Vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 is production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 is production data after operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used as the production data after operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 139, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (c), “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (a), the operation unit B is not operated during the operation unit B operation effective state, but the operation unit B related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation unit B operation effective state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. However, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may vary depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. However, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may vary depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 139 (c), when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 139 (c), the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 139 (a), when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation effective. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 140A to 140C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (a) is an example during the variation display of the decorative symbol. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, the decorative design display device 208 starts the judgment effect. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is terminated before the notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as the confirmation display, so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (b) is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the decorative design display device 208 starts a judge effect. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs the user that the next winning round is aimed at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening). The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (b), if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, and the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example illustrated in FIG. 140A and the example illustrated in FIG. 140B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (c) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) while the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display period started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 140C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

  The upper example shown in FIG. 140D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the variation display of the decorative design, or a judge showing the end in the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example, the period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as effective, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. The Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 140 (d), the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) in stages, and FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 141 in stages.

  The description of the matters described above in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 136 is omitted. In each drawing of FIG. 141, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the chance button 136 that is the operation means A, a transparent portion 191 that is the operation means B is also shown. 141 and 142, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmission portion 191 that is the operation means B is in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 141 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 141 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 141 (b) are lit, and the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3). In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  Here, as in FIG. 136, when the reach effect is started, an example in which the button effect is started is shown. The button effect here is a kind of judge effect, and becomes a notice effect for judging whether or not to develop into a super reach. The button effect may be an effect of judging the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red and prompts the user to press the button effect. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display that prompts the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and Three characters, “PUSH” and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid (operation effective period) are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X for operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the initial position display 136X may be used without including the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH”. For example, the initial position display 136X may not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

  FIG. 141 (e) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 141 (e). When the chance button 136 is operated, the red light up to that point is switched to white light or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated within the operation effective period, the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 141 (f)). The family crest character 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, covers a part of the change icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the change icon c. The fall of the family crest character 247 is an indication of the judgment result of developing into super reach, and as shown in FIG. . After the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (h), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the frog. In the super reach production, in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the first super reach production (weak SP reach production) having a relatively low possibility of a big hit and the second having a relatively high possibility of a big hit. The super-reach effect (strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the eyelid corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Even in this weak SP reach production, a judgment production is performed. Judge production here is an effect to judge whether or not it will be a big hit, it corresponds to the final judge production, and if the princess character appears from the inside when the kite opens, the display of the pattern change currently being performed It will be an indication of the judgment result that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 141 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed. In FIG. 141 (j), although it is not understood, in FIG. 141 (j), some shade is visible in the cloud-like effect display e1, and in FIG. e1 disappears, and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the character display “Rescue the princess” is displayed on the upper right. It should be noted that the character display “Rescue the princess” may be displayed from the timing of FIG. 141 (h). The shade of something described in the explanation of FIG. 10J is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 141 (i) and (j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 141 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can also be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG. 141 (i).

  FIG. 141 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated again at the timing of FIG. 141 (l), and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (l) following FIG. 141 (l), there is no one in the bag with the heel open, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. . Even during execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is located at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  Even if the chance button 136 as the operation means A is not operated within the operation effective period, the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated and the chance button 136 is not operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when a different operation means (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same for the production that judges whether or not it will develop into the super-reach, or it may be limited to the production that judges whether or not it develops into the super-reach, It may be limited to the final judge production that becomes the direct judge for the jackpot.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  Eventually, when the special symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 is finished and confirmed, the decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (n). "-" Decoration 4 "-" decoration 3 "is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through a weak SP reach effect, and is a stepwise example. FIG. 144 is an example shown in FIG. FIG.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 141 and 142 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In FIG. 143 (d), the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 143 (h), the family crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the leopard, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Here, as shown in FIG. 143 (i), an effect display e1 such as a cloud is displayed, and in FIG. 143 (j), some shadows are visible in the effect display e1. . Further, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 performs an advance operation (protrusion operation) while vibrating. In addition, you may start a vibration after protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly halfway between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the middle position. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 143 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and a chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit red in a state where it has advanced to the middle position in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Three simulated button images 136a1, an arrow display 136b, and a remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y for operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of a second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the intermediate position display 136Y may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 becomes zero or until the chance button 136 is pushed. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification It may be at the same time or after that. Further, the timing of completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, or may be simultaneously with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. Also good. The vibration start of the chance button 136 may not coincide with the start of advance of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advance. In the later case, for example, the vibration may be started at the same time as or after completion of the advance operation of the chance button 136 (stop). Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if it is pushed in even a little, or may continue to vibrate until it is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 143 (i) and (j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 143 (k) where the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 143 (i) that the final judge production has started, or it can be seen that the final judge production has started from the point in time when the chance button 136 starts to advance, or the chance button 136. It can also be seen that the final judge production has started from the time when reaches the intermediate position.

  FIG. 143 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the intermediate position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. The result of the performance judge is displayed. In FIG. 144 (m) following FIG. 143 (l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position and is not vibrating, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character GC behind the bag. The judgment result here will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of a second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect started in response to an operation of the chance button 136 that is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time when the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated). It may be started when the first time elapses after the start of the weak SP reach production.

  Note that the effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured to be.

When the final judgment effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 144 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then FIG. ), “Decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are fixedly displayed and a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 142 from the shaking fluctuation display to the confirmation display, the background screen has no pattern. However, in the case of a big hit, the background screen is a collection of lords. In the case of a big hit, a promotion type of jackpot type (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without probability change to a big hit with probability change) may be performed during the fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).
FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144.

  In FIG. 145, alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 143 and 144. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 145 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 143 (d) to (g)). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (i), an effect display e1 is displayed. In FIG. 145 (j), some shadows are visible in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, lights in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. In addition, after advancing to the maximum advancing position, it may be stopped after returning by the first amount toward the initial position. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (k), a button image 136a2 imitating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in the state where it has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow display Three of 136b and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as a maximum advance position display 136Z for operation promotion notification. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the maximum advance position display 136Z may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

The maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification hides a part of the character display “Rescue the princess” because the button image 136a2 is large. The chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, so that the expectation of jackpot is higher than when it has advanced only to the intermediate position or when it has not advanced but stays at the initial position .

  FIG. 145 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the maximum advance position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. 145 (l), is pushed to the initial position, and finally The judgment result of the judge performance is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (m), a princess character GC is displayed in the back of the bag, and it is determined that the judgment result here is a big hit. In FIG. 145 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 that has vibrated at the maximum advance position vibrates both during the push-in operation and after returning to the initial position, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by a pressing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may suspend vibration once it is pushed in, and resume vibration after returning to the initial position. Alternatively, the vibration is temporarily interrupted at the same time as returning to the initial position. May be resumed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 has advanced (protruded), and regardless of the amount of advance of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period during which the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears (all The chance button 136 vibrates during a period, or during a partial period such as the first period. In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates in the notice effect that the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  Note that the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice effect may change according to the type of jackpot or the expected degree of jackpot with certainty. For example, when the degree of expectation of jackpot with probability variation is high, a display mode (second display mode) in which a fan is spread out and danced may be used.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a loss occurs while the effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the strong SP reach effect, and FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 146.

  Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In FIG. 146 (d), the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation valid period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 146 (h), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy character. The background image of this duel scene corresponds to a background image of strong SP reach production. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not it will be a big hit is performed, and if the main character wins, the judgment result will show that it will be a big hit in the current symbol variation display become. As shown in FIG. 146 (i), the effect display e2 such as a flash overlaps the display in which the lord and the enemy character are cut off. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains in the initial position. In FIG. 146 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 is not vibrated. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 146 (i) and (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG. 146 (i).

  FIG. 146 (l) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 146 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (m) displays a scene where the enemy character has won, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. It should be noted that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 147 (m) is in an unlit state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 147 (n), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” in a swinging manner on the plain background screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (o), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of loses, is finalized and lost.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which an effect involving the operating means B (transmission portion 191) is executed through a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is obtained, and FIG. 149 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 147 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Through a judge effect (FIGS. 148 (d) to (g)) on whether or not to develop into a super reach, in FIG. 148 (h), a strong SP reach effect is started. A background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 148 (i), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

  In FIG. 148, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (j), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down to the player side. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing of FIG. 148 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a transmission part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission part 191 is rotated forward, and the transmission part. An arrow display 191b that suggests pressing 191 and a character display “push-in” and a remaining period meter display 191c that represents the remaining period for receiving the operation of the transmission unit 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” are collectively referred to as a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. This transmissive portion display 191X corresponds to an example of a first notification. It should be noted that the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” may not be included, but the transmission portion display 191X may be used. For example, the transmissive part display 191X not including the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. Note that the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission unit display 191X, or the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even when the transmissive portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Moreover, although the transmission part 191 rotated forward is not oscillating, it may be oscillated. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 148 (i) and (j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 148 (k) where the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the effect display e2 has started, or it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the transmission portion 191 has been rotated forward. .

  FIG. 148 (l) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 148 (l), the transmission part 191 as the operation means B is pushed to the initial position. In this example, when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the family crest character 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 149 (m) following FIG. 148 (l). As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right toward the family crest character 247, and as shown in FIG. 149 (n), the pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the crest character 247 from the left and right, Combine with family crests. The effect that suggests that the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B has turned forward may be a big hit, or the effect that suggests that the crest member 247 has fallen becomes a big hit. It may also be an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of combined objects 248 with the family crest member 247 is a big hit. Thereafter, first, the pair of combined objects 248 return to the initial position (FIG. 149 (o), then the family crest object 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 149 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judge production is displayed in the state where there is no obstruction.The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 149 (q) displays the scene where Tono-sama won, and the judgment result here In this scene where the judgment result of the final judge production is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. However, it may be a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “333”), that is, the display of the final judge result and the combination of decorative symbols is a small table. It is, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  It should be noted that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 149 (q) is in an unlit state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 oscillates as “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” fluctuates on the background screen on which the lords gather as shown in FIG. 149 (r). Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (s), “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is fixedly displayed, and it is a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 described above, the family crest member 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIGS. 148 (f) to (g)), In this example, the family crest actor 247 operates in the final judge production (FIGS. 149 (m) to (o)), but the crest actor 247 is not operated before the final judge production. The operation may be performed only in the judgment effect.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 serving as the operation unit A starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 serving as the operation unit B. In FIG. 150, alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 148 and 149 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 150 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). After the operation promotion notification transmissive part display 191X shown in FIG. 150 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, as shown in FIG. 150 (l), the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate without permission (see FIG. 150 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate simultaneously with the start of the final judge effect, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the final judge effect judgment result is displayed (see FIG. 150 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIGS. 150 (m) to (p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judgment effect, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 150 (q), there is a case where it is not oscillating and the judgment result can be noticed. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect ends. In this case, the chance button 136 always vibrates during the entire period of the final judge effect. In addition, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect ends, and the initial position of the operation promotion notification to the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect ends. The display 136X may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is oscillating as part of the final judgment effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150 described above, the final judgment effect in FIG. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, the chance button 136 that vibrates was not operated, but when the chance button 136 that vibrates during the execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued. In accordance with the operation, first, the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 return to the initial positions, and then the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the earlier the judgment result can be viewed. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judgment effect shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the chance button 136 (second operation means) vibrates during execution of the final judgment effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 150, FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 145 (m) is not started. Further, the effects (second effects) shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m) are configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 150. Production.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is also operated after the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B is operated. 151. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 151 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 150 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 151 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 151, when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transparent portion 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 151 (l)). That is, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  In this example, after the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation means A is pushed down this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts oscillating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts oscillating in response to the pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when the predetermined longest vibration time has elapsed since the start of vibration, the chance button 136 ends the vibration even if it is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 151, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 151 (r1)) after the final judge effect is finished and the shaking fluctuation display is started, but the shaking fluctuation display is started. After a while, the longest vibration time has been reached, and the vibration has ended even when pressed (see FIG. 151 (r2)). The longest vibration time corresponds to the six frames in FIGS. 151 (m) to (r1). The fluctuation display continues for a while after that (FIG. 151 (r3) to (r4) in FIG. 151), and the first time (FIG. 151 (r2) to 3 (r4) in FIG. 151) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating. As shown in FIG. 151 (s), “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are confirmed and displayed as a big hit. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 151, the fluctuation fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIGS. 151 (r1) to (r4).

  In the example in FIG. 151, it can also be seen that the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest member 247 falls. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 151 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 151 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of the case where the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 151. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 152 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 151 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 152 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 152, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmission unit 191 is operated with a delay of one frame from the example shown in FIG. 151 (see FIG. 152 (l2)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 151, the start of the final judgment effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses is also 1. Shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 152, the longest vibration time corresponds to six frames in FIGS. 152 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (r1). The fluctuation display continues for a second time (a time corresponding to two frames from FIG. 152 (r2) to FIG. 152 (r3)) after the chance button 136 stops oscillating, and then in FIG. 152 (s). As shown, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is finalized and a big hit. As described above, the fluctuation variation display is a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 151, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 152, the fluctuation display is shown in FIGS. 152 (r1) to (r3). ) For three frames, and the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation display is shortened by a delay of the timing for operating the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 which is the operation unit B vibrates when the housing vibrates. 153 in FIG. 153 corresponds to the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses in FIG. 151. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 151 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 153 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 153 (k), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates at the second position (front inclined position) rotated forward from the initial position (first position). Yes. Even though the transmission part 191 itself does not vibrate, the transmission part 191 vibrates when the casing to which the transmission part 191 is directly or indirectly attached vibrates. The casing here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmission unit 190. In this example, the operation of the transmission part 191 can be urged by the vibration of the transmission part 191 in addition to the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 153 (k). In FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing is finished. This time, when the chance button 136 as the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

  Note that the vibration of the housing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may start when the transmission part 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission part 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may be started from the point in time, or may be started when the transmission part 191 is not operated even after the first time has elapsed after the transmission part 191 has reached the forward inclined position. Further, the vibration of the casing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed a little from the front inclined position. Even if it is pushed in, it may continue to vibrate during the first vibration period after the vibration is started or returned to the initial position, and there may be a period during which it vibrates together with the chance button 136.

  Similarly to the transmissive portion 191 in this example, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A is also, for example, a housing (for example, a chance button 136 attached directly or indirectly, even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate). The ball storage tray door 108) may vibrate when vibrated.

  Furthermore, the transmission part 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction.

  FIGS. 150 (m) to (q), 151 (m) to (q), 152 (m) to (q), and 153 (m) to (q) described above. ) Shown in FIG. 144 (m) or 145 (m) described earlier is different from the aspect of the final effect shown in FIG. That the mode of production is different means that the background screen is different, the characters appearing are different, or the colors of the displayed characters are different.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission part 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 154 shows different examples on the left and right sides.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 154 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (g)). The state of FIG. 154 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 146 (k), and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position.

  FIG. 154 (a) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 154 (a), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 146, the judgment result of the final judgment effect is not immediately displayed, and the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. 151 (m) and the like. As the image changes, the background image changes. Furthermore, in this example, as the family crest member 247 falls, the transmission part 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 154 (c)). Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (d), the family crest role 247 is sandwiched by a pair of combined features 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined features 248 and the family crest combination 247 are combined, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), the transmission portion 191 rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position in a state where the pair of combined characters 248 is returned to the initial position and the crest character 247 remains. Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (f), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission part 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position again.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 154, the strong vibration that the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B repeats the rotation between the initial position and the forward inclined position at the same time as the final judgment effect is started. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or can be seen as a production different from the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 154 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). The state of FIG. 154 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 151 (k), and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmission part 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. doing. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 154 (i) is within the operation effective period of the transmissive part 191, but in this FIG. 154 (i), not the transmissive part 191, but the chance button 136 that is unlit at the initial position is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, the final judgment effect is executed and the transmissive portion 191 has an initial position and a forward inclined position, as in the example where the transmissive portion 191 on the left side of FIG. 154 is operated. Strong vibration that repeats the rotation between. In other words, the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward tilt position to the initial position in FIG. 154 (U), rotates from the initial position to the forward tilt position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in FIG. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 154 (i), the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which the scene where the enemy role wins is displayed once through the strong SP reach production, but is a big hit by the resurrection production, FIG. 156 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  The example shown in FIG. 155 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 148, and after the judgment effect (FIG. 155 (d) to FIG. (G)) on whether or not to develop into super reach, in FIG. 155 (h) Then, the strong SP reach effect is started, and in the same figure (i), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 155 (j), in the state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At this timing, the effect display e2 disappears, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 remains in the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 155 (l), the transmission part 191 is pushed in. In FIG. 156 (α) following FIG. 155 (l), a scene where the enemy role similar to FIG. 147 (m), which is considered to be the judgment result of the final judge performance, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, As indicated by 156 (β), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 3” is temporarily started.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (γ), a sign is displayed when the restoration effect is started, and the restoration effect is executed from FIG. 156 (m) to FIG. The resurrection effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIGS. 149 (m) to (p), and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248. Appears.

  When the revival effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 156 (r), the swing variation display of the big hit combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is started immediately, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the big hit combination “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” is fixedly displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 156 (α), which is considered to be the judgment result of the final judgment effect, is a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136 that is the operation means A nor the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B vibrate, but the display of the duel result (display of the judgment result of the final judge effect) is displayed, whether true or false. If it is certain that a big hit will be made at the displayed timing or after that, if the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191 vibrate, it will be a big hit for the advanced player. There is a case that the interest of the game is improved. That is, the judgment result (true result) of the final judgment effect may be notified using the vibration of the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the third effect in stages. 157 in FIG. 157 corresponds to the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses in FIG. 141 and the like.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (c), the reach effect is started. In this example, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation which is a kind of button effect is started. An effect involving the operation here is also a kind of judge effect, and is a notice effect that judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. In FIG. 157 (d), as an effect involving the operation, the transmissive portion 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmissive portion display 191X for the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. Note that the transmissive portion display 191X ′ shown in FIG. 11D is a display having the same function although slightly different from the transmissive portion display 191X described so far. Note that the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position without vibrating.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (e), the transparent portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period of the transparent portion 191, and in FIG. 15 (f), a family crest character 247 is placed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It will fall. Further, in FIG. 141 (f) and the like, the background image has no pattern, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (f) displays a shaded effect display e3. A part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest character 247. Here again, the fall of the family crest character 247 is an indication of the judgment result of developing into super reach, and then develops into super reach. The effect of FIG. 157 (f) described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that starts in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the notice effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. 158 in FIG. 158 corresponds to the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses in FIG. 148.

  The example shown in FIG. 158 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (f)). The judgment effect of whether or not to develop into the super reach ends in FIG. 158 (g), and the super reach effect is started from FIG. This super reach production is different from the strong SP reach production and the weak SP reach production described so far, and is the production selected by the production lottery. However, the transmissive part 191 rotated to the forward inclined position shown in FIGS. 148 (j) to 148 (k) has a remaining period meter display 191c of the transmissive part display 191X of the operation promotion notification remaining ½ or more. 150, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 150 is executed, and when it is operated at a timing when only less than 1/2 remains, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 158 is executed. Also good. In other words, even if one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 150 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 158 is started in accordance with the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B, it is configured. Good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 158 (h ′), a background image in which the protagonist is chasing a bad merchant is displayed. In FIG. 158 (i ′), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed. The Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 (j ′), the transmission portion 191 that is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the effect display e2 is displayed at the timing of FIG. 158 (k ′). Instead, an operation promotion notification transmission part display 191X is displayed. FIG. 158 (l ′) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position.

  The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission unit 191. In FIG. 158 (m ′), the townscape of the castle town is different from the background image shown in FIG. 149 (m). A background crest object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. 149 (m). Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (n ′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, the family crest character 247 is sandwiched between the pair of combined characters 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined characters 248 and The family crest character 247 unites. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (o ′), the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position, and the crest character 247 remains in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town. As shown in (p ′), the crest character 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the background image of the townscape of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state, the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (q ′), a scene where Tono-sama caught a bad merchant is displayed, and it is certain that the judgment result here is a big hit. The chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position without vibration during the execution period of the final judgment effect shown in FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′), which corresponds to an example of the third effect. . 158 (m ′) to FIG. 150 (q ′), the final judge effects are shown in FIGS. 150 (m) to (q), 151 (m) to (q), and 152 (m). ~ (Q), 153 (m) ~ Unlike the aspect of the final judge effect shown in (q), it is not executed simultaneously with these final judge effects. Further, unlike the judgment effect modes shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m), the judgment effect is not executed simultaneously.

  Further, in FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′), the chance button 136 that is unlit at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is It is not a so-called back button. Note that an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples described so far. FIG. 159 shows different examples on the left side and the right side.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 159 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136. This LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

  In FIG. 159 (a), as in FIG. 151 (k) and the like, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmissive portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification, and the transmissive portion 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. It is moving. In FIG. 159 (a), the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judgment effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 159 (a), the final judgment effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and the family crest character 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image changes. Until the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains unlit at the initial position without vibration, but after the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts to vibrate when operated. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be ended simultaneously with the end of the final judge effect, or may be ended before the end of the final judge effect. Even if the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 remains off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 is turned on or blinks here as well. Note that the lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 159 (c), the final judge effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a shaking fluctuation display. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judgment effect is finished, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, the LED lamp 139 is also lit or blinking here. Note that the lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 159 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 that imitates the chance button 136 that lights in red and vibrates is included. An initial position display 136X ′ is displayed. The real chance button 136 is also lit red and vibrates. Even if the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is not vibrating is displayed, the real chance button 136 may be vibrating.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 160, four examples are shown on the left side, and one example is also shown on the right side. The example shown in the upper two on the left (the example shown in FIG. 160 (a) and the example shown in FIG. 160 (A)) also passes through a certain effect (the effects shown in FIG. 148 (d) to FIG. This is an effect that is not executed unless it is empty.

  First, in FIG. 160 (a), which is the first example, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background image of the duel scene, and the lower left. The transmissive part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmissive part 191 is rotated forward is displayed. Moreover, the character display showing that the glass button which points to the permeation | transmission part 191 is waiting is also made | formed. These transparent portion rotation images 191a and the standby character display then become a notice display that the transparent portion 191 that is a glass button rotates to the forward tilt position. When this notice display is made, thereafter, the transmission part 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward tilt position.

  In FIG. 160A, which is the second example, a background image of a duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 160A, and the remaining period is displayed by digital display at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a notice display that the transmissive part 191 rotates to the forward tilt position. When the remaining period by the remaining period display reaches 0.00 seconds, the transmissive part 191 that is a glass button is moved to the forward tilt position. Always rotate until.

  In FIG. 160A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display means 209 is a liquid crystal display device that has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 that is the first display means, and is movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is operated with a button effect such as a final judge effect, movable characters such as a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 operate, and the second display means 209 is moved to the initial position. The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display unit 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A may vibrate or the transmission part 191 may vibrate while the second display means 209 is operating or after the operation is completed. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 may be a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may vibrate in the overlapping state.

  FIG. 160A, which is the fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 160 (a) can perform stock display of the button image B. Here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B represents that one button effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 160A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B. The button effects corresponding to the remaining three button images B are executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the jackpot game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of jackpot rounds. Further, as the button effects corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

  Note that the second display means 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and the reliability of the pre-reading notice from the display mode of the button image B by the button operation. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also at this time, an operating means for receiving a button operation (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission part 191) may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 160, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (α), a button image 136a4 simulating the chance button 136 in the extinguished state and an arrow display 136b as a prompt display prompting the user to press and hold the chance button 136 for a long time. In addition, three characters are displayed as one set: a character display “Long press to save the meter” and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” will be collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification long press display 136L. The long press display 136L may be used even if the three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” are not included. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, a level display L1 is also displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L1 is a display that is leveled up according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 160 (α) is 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and the level display L1 reaches the full tank level before the remaining period of the operation effective period is exhausted, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full tank level. Here, the transmission unit 191 (not shown) which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and as shown in FIG. 160 (β), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transmission unit display 191X for notifying the operation promotion. It is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation, but here, even if the operation is to repeatedly press a short period of time that cannot be said to be a long press (single press), Even a so-called continuous hitting operation that handles or repeatedly presses for a short period of time is treated as a long press operation. Note that even when a continuous hit operation is required, a long press operation or a single press operation may be treated as a continuous hit operation (the same applies to the following examples). Although not shown in the figure, when the transmissive portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period, the judgment effect is started.

  Next, an effect involving a so-called pseudo-ream will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-ream is also executed when “execute” is won by the execution possibility determination lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the special symbol variation display. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, for one special symbol variation display (that is, one start prize). The decorative symbol display is temporarily stopped in some or all of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the decorative symbol update is stopped but not yet confirmed, and is shaken. Or the like, the display may be re-variably displayed once or a plurality of times. For example, while the decorative symbols are updated (variable display) in the middle symbol display region 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. Variation display may be started, or variation display of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in all symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then re-variation display may be started. In addition, when temporary stop is performed, symbols and designs other than decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo-continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for the symbol variation display of one special chart (that is, one start winning prize) is determined by lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Is done. The pseudo-rendition effect may be a jackpot notice effect (so-called normal notice effect) of the change, which predicts that the symbol change display of the special figure currently being performed will be a big hit, or the special effect currently being performed. It may be a reach notice effect for notifying the development to super reach with the symbol variation display in the figure. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big win will be given by the symbol variation display of the special symbol starting after the symbol variation display of the special symbol currently being performed. Regardless of the notice effect, as the number of re-variable displays increases, the degree of expectation (the reliability of the notice) increases, resulting in a hot effect. In addition, when a re-variable display is performed for the first number of times (for example, four times), a big hit decision or a super reach decision may be made. In the case of a pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variable displays increases as the symbol variation table of the special figure to be noticed approaches. For example, when the symbol variation table of the special chart after 3 times is targeted for the notice, the re-variation display is performed once in the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table of the first special diagram, and the second special diagram is displayed. In the quasi-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variable display is performed twice, and in the pseudo-variable effect in the symbol variation table of the third special diagram, the re-variable display is performed three times. In the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variation display is performed four times.

In the pseudo continuous effect, the first pseudo continuous notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. The first pseudo-continuous notification here is to notify that the pseudo-continuous production is started or that the pseudo-continuous production is continued. For example, any one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-continuous symbols”) among the combinations of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspond to an example of the first pseudo-continuous notification. To do. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) shown in FIG. 132 (b) or a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 2”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 6”). , So-called chance eyes), or other patterns or patterns. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. Alternatively, the first pseudo continuous notification may be character display, lamp lighting, or sound output that is started simultaneously with the temporary stop.
FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving pseudo-ream step by step.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161, a transparent portion display 191X for notifying the operation promotion is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 161 (a), as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 161 (c) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position. Then, in response to the operation of the transmission part 191, as shown in FIG. 161 (d), the transmission part display 191X disappears, and this time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts to vibrate at the initial position. In FIG. 161 (d), a pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 161 (d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous symbol N that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 161 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo continuous pattern N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the effective operation period. When the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 161 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, and the pseudo-continuous symbol N remains and the temporary stop is made. In some cases, the pseudo position symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X, and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to 161 (f) are judged effects indicating whether or not a temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 161 (f), the pseudo continuous symbol N remains and the first temporary stop is performed. The first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 161 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are both in the changing display, and the changing icon c is also displayed.

  In FIG. 161 (g), the pseudo continuous symbol N disappears, and the decorative symbol update (re-variable display) is started in all the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of the special figure is still continued, the first special symbol display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special Fig. 1 are in the variable display, and the variation icon c is also displayed. However, the start of re-variation display here seems as if the start of special symbol variation display has been performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (g) displays characters “× 2”. Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when viewed as a special symbol design variation display, it looks like the second special symbol design variation display due to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. In the meaning of representing, “× 2” is displayed. That is, the character display “× 2” is a notification representing the number of times related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. This character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of a second pseudo continuous notification.

In FIG. 161 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop is performed in FIG. 161 (f) is continued, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position by rotating to the forward inclined position, the second temporary stop judgment effect is started.
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects involving pseudo-ream.

  In the example in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 10B, the transparent portion display 191X for the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 162A. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. Further, the transmissive part display 191X whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 162 (b) is overlapped with the gray temporary pseudo-continuous pattern N ′ whose display is started at the same timing of FIG. 162 (b). As a result, in FIG. 162 (b), a part of the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ is also displayed.

  FIG. 162 (c) is within the operation effective period, and when the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position, a judgment effect is started according to the operation of the transmissive part 191. The judgment effect here is when the transmissive part 191 is operated, the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary tentative pattern N ′ is changed from the gray tentative pseudo continuous pattern N ′, and the temporary stop is performed. Even if the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ does not change to the pseudo-continuous symbol N, but disappears to the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′, and temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG. 162 (d), the temporary stop pattern is changed to white pseudo-continuous pattern N and the first temporary stop is performed. Although the change from the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N ′ to the pseudo continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, it may be changed to a completely different symbol. Note that both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 162 (d) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the changing state, and the changing icon c is also displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission part 191 is operated, that is, even if the result of the judgment effect in FIG. 162 (d) is displayed, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A is extinguished at the initial position without vibrating. However, the chance button 136 may start to vibrate at the initial position according to the operation of the transmission part 191, or may start to vibrate while moving forward, or start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned on or blinked.

  162 (b ′) to FIG. 162 (d ′) are modified examples of FIG. 162 (b) to FIG. FIG. 162 (b ′) and FIG. 162 (c ′) show the roaring effects that the temporary stop has not yet started and the pseudo-continuous effects may be started. That is, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo continuous symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 162 (b ′), the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. The chance button 136 may start to vibrate before FIG. 162 (b ′). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 162 (d ′), and the temporary stop is performed. On the contrary, in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. As described above, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (b ′) to (d ′) involving the chance button 136 as the operation means A are a kind of judge effects and correspond to an example of the second effect.

  162 (b ″) to FIG. 162 (d ″) are modified examples of FIG. 162 (b ′) to FIG. In FIG. 162 (b ′) and FIG. 16 (c ′), the chance button 136 that is the operation means A vibrates, but in FIG. 162 (b ″) to FIG. 162 (d ″), the chance button 136 Is not oscillating, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. 162 (b ″) to FIG. 162 (d ″), similarly to FIG. 162 (b ′) and FIG. 162 (c ′), a roaring effect that may start the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. ing. Then, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, the second pseudo-continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 162 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo continuous symbol N. On the contrary, here, the pseudo-continuous symbol N may disappear in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started. Also in this example, when the judgment effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transmission portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the temporary operation is temporarily performed according to the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo continuous symbol (second pseudo continuous symbol N2) different from the pseudo continuous symbol to be stopped temporarily stops.

  The description of the specific example of the effect so far has been an example in the symbol variation display of the special symbol, but the same applies to other than the symbol variation display of the special symbol.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shaking fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the jackpot game. FIG. 164 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 163 (a), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” big hit (normal big hit) is performed in the center area of the background screen where the lords gather. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the shaking fluctuation display. The promotion effect here is a jackpot type promotion effect (probable change promotion effect), and as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the fluctuation fluctuation display is temporarily reduced and displayed on the upper left as shown in FIG. At the same time, an operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed in the central area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. The probable promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect.

  FIG. 163 (c) is within the operation effective period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the fluctuation variation display of the combination of decorative symbols is redisplayed. In this example, the probability change promotion has failed, and as shown in FIG. 163 (d), the combination of an even number of decoration symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” has no probable big hit (normal hit) The fluctuation fluctuation display of the combination of is displayed. On the other hand, when the probabilistic promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of the odd-numbered decoration symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) is redisplayed. The However, whether or not it is a big hit with probability change is determined by the determination of winning or not (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether success or failure of the probability change promotion here is according to the determination of whether or not winning (winning) at the time of winning The same applies to the probable promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. Thereafter, the display is confirmed and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbol variation display that is displayed in the fluctuation variation in FIG. 163 (d) (see FIG. 163 (e)).

  In FIG. 163 (e) following FIG. 163 (e), a big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested to make a right-hand hit, and a hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the number of consecutive big hits is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “first time” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (g). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (g), the probability variation promotion effect is started again. The probable promotion effect here is also a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect. In FIG. 163 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position and prompts the user to press it. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display for prompting a continuous operation of the chance button 136, and “continuous hitting”. Three characters are displayed as one set, a character display of “shiro” and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Let's hit repeatedly” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification repeated hitting display 136R. Note that the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Randomly hit” may not be included, but may be displayed as a continuous shot 136R. For example, the continuous hitting display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L2 is a display that is leveled up according to the number of consecutive hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 163 (h) is the 0 level.

  Thereafter, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and in FIG. 163 (i), there is no remaining operation valid period. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 163 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the level display L2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached three levels, but has not reached the MAX level. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (j) following (i), the continuous hitting display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and a character display of “defense failure” indicating failure of probability change promotion is displayed.

  Further, during the jackpot game started in FIG. 163 (f), as shown in FIG. 164 (k) following FIG. 163 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. In addition to the display, a character display “Push it in and return to life” is also made, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect is also started here. This button effect is an effect of judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) can be aimed at a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is ready for winning. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 164 (l) is within the operation effective period of the transmission part 191, and the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position. In response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to vibrate at the initial position. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Further, although the chance button 136 has started to vibrate, there may be cases where the vibration does not start.

  Furthermore, the production movable body (movable accessory) operates in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191. That is, the family crest character 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. The pair of combined characters 248 and the family crest character 247 are combined with each other.

Next, the family crest role 247 and the pair of combined roles 248 return to the initial positions, and the result of the judgment effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (n). A character display of “successful survival” indicating that a winning is possible is displayed. The chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 164 (m), but may be vibrated at this timing. In addition, an asterisk with a letter “GET” is also displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 164 (n) following FIG. 164 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and aims at a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening). Character display is made. In FIG. 164 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of “V Aim”, and the game ball passes the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in (q) in the figure, the letter “V” is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, wins the specific winning opening V, and shifts to a certainty state (for example, after the big hit game is over). ) Is informed. Then, an end effect of the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 164 (r)), and the jackpot game ends.
In the above description,

“First operation means [for example, transparent portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
A second operating means [for example, a chance button 136];
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,

  The first effect is a notice effect [e.g., FIG. 150 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 151 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 152 (m) to FIG. (M) to the final judge production shown in (q) of FIG.

  The first production is configured to start according to the operation of the first operation means,

In the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 150 (m) to FIG. 15 (p), FIG. 151 (m) to FIG. 152 (m) -FIG. (R1), FIG. 153 (m)-(r2), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Whether it is the first operation means or the second operation means, a button, such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel may be used. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers, and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only those that are operated by direct contact, but also those that can be operated by holding the hand even if direct contact is not possible.

  Moreover, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the modes may differ depending on the operation means such as the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, and pitch. For example, the first operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the second aspect.

  The notice effect may be one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects. The notice here may be a jackpot notice, a advance notice to Super Reach, a pseudo-continuous start notice, or a pseudo-continuous notice. .

  The execution period of the notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the display start of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or the confirmation of the decorative symbol It may be up to display. Alternatively, it may be until the movable means starts moving from the first position to the second position and then returns to the first position again, or until it starts moving to the first position. Also good. More specifically, when the first effect is the final judge effect, the decorative symbol temporarily stops (fluctuates and fluctuates) in combination with the big hit symbol pattern from the start of the notification or the like that is performed for the first time after the button operation. The execution period of the first effect may be until the end of the button operation or until the end of the button operation (particularly the result of success) is displayed.

  Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at the second position (for example, the final arrival position), for example, when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. Alternatively, it may vibrate in a state where an effect display or the like executed in accordance with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the movable means is located at the second position and the effect is displayed. You may vibrate in the state where the image is displayed.

  Furthermore, “the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operation means” means that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operation means. Then, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means and other conditions (operations of other operation means, etc.) being satisfied. In addition, the first effect may be started only in response to an operation of the first operation means, and if other conditions are satisfied even if the first operation means is not operated, The first effect may be started. For example, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first effect may be started even if the first operation means is not operated, and conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation means, the fixed time Even if it passes, the aspect in which said 1st production may not be started may be sufficient.

  The first effect may be configured to be able to start in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be always started, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or only by the operation of the first operation means. It may be started.

  In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the first state, the first effect may be executed. Here, the first state may be a state in which notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means is performed, or a state in which such notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed. The establishment of the first condition here includes that the first operating means has been operated.

  Further, “in the first effect” may or may not extend over the first effect.

  In addition, “in the first effect, the second operation means vibrates” includes not only starting to vibrate arbitrarily but also starting to vibrate when a condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one that does not vibrate unless it is operated continuously, may be one that vibrates continuously without being pressed, and is not continuous and intermittent. May vibrate.

  Further, even after the first performance is finished, the second operation means may be capable of vibrating, and in this case, the second operation means may always vibrate or vibrate. There may be cases where the vibration is not performed, the vibration may be performed other than the vibration, or only the vibration may be performed.

  Furthermore, it may continue to vibrate from the first effect, or may be temporarily stopped and restarted. Alternatively, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is finished.

  Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. Alternatively, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect executed at intervals among the multiple effects, and the second operation means may be configured to perform the first operation in all of the multiple effects. The two operating means may be configured to vibrate.

Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect. Furthermore, “the second operation means is configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect” means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. It may be configured to be performed regardless of whether or not to do so.
Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,

The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m), etc.]
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,

  The second effect is configured to start in response to an operation of the second operation means [for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 143 (l) or FIG. 145 (l)],

The second operating means is configured to vibrate before the second presentation starts [for example, FIG. 143 (j) to FIG. (K), FIG. 145 (j) to FIG. (K) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the display of the image prompting the operation is started, or configured to start vibration after the start of the operation reception state. Also good.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. In addition, it may be configured to vibrate after the end of the second effect.

  An effect (second effect) that is started in response to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects. There may be a case where the second operation means may vibrate before the second presentation is started.

  Furthermore, everything performed by the operation of the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, all of liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking, and the like. However, the second effect may target only the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means performed in the first effect continues until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the second operation means is operated, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may end, or when the second operation means is operated, it may end, or when the first effect ends, it may end together, or the first effect ends. However, it may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (it may end immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol or at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means that is performed before the start of the second effect may end when the second operation means is operated, or the second effect starts. May be terminated at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration end condition is determined when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed before the second effect is started. Will be different.

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means performed before the start of the second effect is continued until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the first operation means is operated. However, it may end when the vibration time elapses, or may continue until the first effect ends, and may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol) Or it may end simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol). In these cases, the vibration end condition is the same when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed before the second effect is started.
Also,

“A second display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The first effect is an effect by displaying the image,
The second effect is an effect by displaying the image,

If the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where no new effect is started even if the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for music output from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  Further, the second operating means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Furthermore, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.
Also,

“In the second performance, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 145 (m)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The second operating means may vibrate before the start of the second effect, and may continuously vibrate in the second effect, or may be resumed after being temporarily interrupted. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operation means before the start of the second effect may be executed during a reception state period of the second operation means.

In addition, the gaming machine includes a first operation means and a second operation means, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one effect among the plurality of effects is The first effect is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, and the second effect is a notice effect. Yes, the first production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means, and the second operation device is configured to vibrate in the first production. In the second production, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.
Also,

“When the second operating means vibrates rather than the case where the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 141 (j) to FIG. FIG. (L) etc.] is configured to make it easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state or a subsequent probability change state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that “a state advantageous to the player” means a big hit (small hit) and a big hit gaming state, a probability change state between probability change and short time, 15R big hit and 4R big hit. Of these, a gaming state of 15R big hit (big hit with a larger number of rounds) or a state in which 100 times of 100 times and 50 times of electric support are given.

  Further, “so that it is easy to shift” may be that the game is surely shifted to the big hit gaming state if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit decision, and the second operation means may necessarily vibrate in the first effect.

  In addition, it includes first display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,

When the second operating means vibrates [for example, FIGS. 143 (j) to FIG. 143] than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 141 (j) to FIG. (L) etc.] may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be associated with a jackpot, and further may be configured to be more likely to be associated with a jackpot with probability variation.
Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,

The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 158 (m ′) to (q ′), etc.]
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,

  The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,

In the third effect, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 158 (m ′) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

The second operating means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes vibration when the third effect ends. It may be a thing.
Also,

The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that during the period in which any one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect is started in accordance with the operation of the first operation means.
Also,
`` It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,

  The first notification is a notification urging the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 150 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 151 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 152 (k)] ~ Transmission part display 191X etc. of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. (L2), FIG. 153 (k) and FIG.

The first effect is the first period [for example, period from FIG. 150 (k) to FIG. (L), period from FIG. 151 (k) to FIG. (L), FIG. 152 (k) to FIG. (The period of (l2), the period of FIG. 153 (m) to the period of (l), etc.)] is the effect that starts when the first operating means is operated,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.
Also,

“The second operating means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being executed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. 151 to 152 and 153, and the example of FIG. 150. It is means configured to vibrate in part of the period etc. because it does not vibrate in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The first operation means is a means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate,

The second operation means is a means [for example, a chance button 136] configured to be capable of vibrating.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that “vibration” means direct vibration when the operation means itself vibrates, and does not include indirect vibration in the case of indirect vibration due to vibration of other members. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

Even in a state where the first effect is not executed [for example, a state during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to (e), not the final judge effect, etc.) The operating means may be configured to vibrate.
Also,

“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.
* D3047P
Next, the back button effect in which the start timing is changed by an operation will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIG. 128.

  FIG. 165 (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those described above. In addition, description of items that have been described so far may be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 165 (A) has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance buttons described so far are referred to as a button A or a first chance button 136, and a chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as a button B or a second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position separated by LA from the ball launching handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), while the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball launch handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another point of view, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the horizontal center of the pachinko machine 100 than the button A (second chance button 136). Yes.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Similarly to the first chance button 136, the button B (second chance button 137) is a kind of movable means, can be vibrated, and can be advanced (protruded). On the contrary, only the button B (second chance button 137) is not a movable means and may not vibrate and may not advance (protrude). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not include a chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons such as a third chance button, or an operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 164, the button B (second chance button 137) illustrated in FIG. 165A can be applied instead of the transmission unit 191 described as an example of the operation unit B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 128 can be applied in place of the transmission part 191, but the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 128 does not have a vibration function, and therefore needs to be provided with a vibration function. There is.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 165 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbols of the losing (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (b), the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, notification that the operation is in an effective state (for example, red lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138) or operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, initial position display 136X). ) Is not performed, and the player cannot know that the operation is in an effective state. However, a person who knows from the information such as a bachinko magazine that the operation may be in an effective state when the reach production is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. This corresponds to a so-called back button.

Note that not only the button A (first chance button 136) but also the button B (second chance button 137) or the image C of the cut-in notice by the character is displayed in response to the operation of the transparent portion 191. You may be made to do.
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect in stages.

  In each figure in FIG. 166, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 166 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disparity “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (a), four black circle hold icons which are the hold display in FIG. 1 are displayed, and no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. .

  In FIG. 166 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started to be displayed. Further, the hold icons are reduced by one and displayed three (hold icons h1 to h3), and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 166 (c), reach production is started. Here, the button effect is started in response to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 166 (d) starts to light red. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (d), the button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has begun to light red, and the button B (second chance button 137). ) As a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of), a character display of “PUSH”, and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation effective period of the button B (second chance button 137) Are displayed as a set. Hereinafter, the three images 137a, 137b, and 137c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification button B display 137X.

  In the example shown in FIG. 166, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 166 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X for promoting operation is reduced by about 1/5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 166 (f)). ). Note that when the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, the state returns to the off state. The effect in which the image C of the cut-in notice is displayed according to the operation of the button B is the button effect and corresponds to an example of the fifth effect. The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character is an effect display displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbols. The operation promotion notification button B display 137X corresponds to an example of a third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 166 (d) to FIG. It corresponds to an example of three periods.

  The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character (fifth effect) may be an effect that does not start unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, when the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, when the effective operation period of the button B has elapsed, it may be an effect that starts when the button B has elapsed, The effect to be started may be used.

  Further, after the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. In other words, the second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137). Here, after the operation of the button B is performed for a while (time for one frame). Is started) and starts from FIG. 166 (g). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (g), the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character is still displayed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button A (first chance button 136). The initial position display 136X is not displayed. Further, the button A is in a state where the light remains off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 166 (g). In response to the operation of the button A here, a character image G of “Intense heat” is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is certain that a big hit will be made in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and will show the judgment result of the final judgment effect. In addition, since it is an effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fourth effect that starts in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is different from the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. Note that the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of being lost in the currently displayed symbol variation display is a character image of “sorry”.

  The second period started from FIG. 166 (g) is an operation effective period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and notification that the operation is effective is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display (fourth effect) of the image G of the characters “Intense heat” is an effect that does not start unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the cut-in notice image C (fifth effect) by the Tono-sama character may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button is displayed. If is not operated, the fourth effect is not started. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing at which the button A is operated and the timing at which the operation effective period ends.

  In this example, the execution period of the button effect of FIGS. 166 (d) to (g) and the execution period of the back button effect of (g) to (i) are partially overlapped. They may all overlap. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap at least in a part of the period. On the contrary, the effect period after the button operation for the back button effect and the operation effective period for the button effect may overlap at least in a part of the period.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timing for operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 166. In FIG. 167, the timing of the alphabetical drawing number written in parentheses is the same as the timing of the alphabetic drawing number written in parentheses in FIG. In the following, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 166 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 167, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 166 (see FIG. 167 (f)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 166, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period that starts after the passage of time is also shifted backward by one frame. In the example shown in FIG. 167, the button A is operated following the operation of the button B as shown in FIG. 10G, but the second period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The operation of the button A here is accepted but is not treated as valid. Even if the player operates the button A at the timing of FIG. 167 (g), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all. Therefore, the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 167 (h). . In response to this second operation, the image G of the character “Intense heat” is cut-in displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 166 (FIG. 166 (g) corresponding to an example of the first time) is the start timing of the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 166 (b)). ) After four frames have elapsed (corresponding to an example of the first time), whereas the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 167 (corresponding to an example of the second time) (H)) is after the elapse of time for five frames (corresponding to an example of the second time) from the start timing of the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 167 (b)), and the start timing of the second period is Variable (undefined).

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 166 or in the example of FIG. 167, the example is an effect related to the operation of two types of chance buttons. For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transmission unit 191 or the third chance button.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between the button A (first chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137).

  FIG. 168 shows two examples. In the example shown in the upper part, the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red and the button B (second chance button 136) is lit red. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a function to vibrate (first function), and the button B has a function to rotate (second function).

  In FIG. 168 (a), only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts to vibrate. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

  In FIG. 168 (b), only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button B exhibits the second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of button B). Further, in this example, even when the button B137 is operated in the state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 168, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 168 (A), only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts vibration, and also exhibits a second function and starts rotating. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

In FIG. 168 (B), only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. Even if the button B is operated, the button B remains lit and neither vibration nor rotation starts. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one of the functions (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed only by one operation (here, the operation of the button B). In this example, even if the button B137 is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates.
In the above description,

“A game machine equipped with second operation means [for example, button A (chance button 136), etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,

  One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect [e.g., a cut-in notice of “hot heat” shown in FIGS. 166 (h) to (i) and 167 (i), respectively]]. And

The fourth effect is configured to start according to the operation of the second operation means,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,

  The second notification is a notification [for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification] that prompts the operation of the second operation means,

  The fourth effect is an effect that may be performed in a decorative symbol variation display [for example, 3 ↓ 3 displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, respectively]. ,

The fourth effect is an effect that starts when the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 166 (g), FIG. 167 (h), etc.] in the second period,
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,

  The second period is a period that may start at the first time in the variable display [for example, the time in FIG. 166 (g), etc.]

The second period is a period that may start at a second time in the variable display [for example, the time of FIG. 167 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may be always executed or may not be executed, other than a plurality of types of effects may be executed, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. .
Also,

[Equipped with third operation means [for example, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]

The second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the third operation means [for example, after the button B operation, the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character display starts, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect [e.g., cut-in notice by character display starting from FIG. 166 (f), FIG. 167 (g), etc.]
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,

  The third notification is a notification [for example, an operation promotion notification button B display 137X] that prompts the operation of the third operation means,

  The fifth effect is configured to start in response to an operation of the third operating means,

The fifth effect is the third operation means in a third period [for example, the period of FIG. 166 (d) to FIG. 10 (e), the period of FIG. 167 (d) to FIG. Is operated [for example, FIG. 166 (e), FIG. 167 (f), etc.],
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the third period is a period in which the third notification is performed.
Also,
The aspect of the fifth effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the fourth effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The fifth effect is an effect that may be performed in a variation display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 166 (f), FIG. 167 (g), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

The fifth effect is an effect that does not start unless the third operation means is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

The fifth effect is an effect that starts even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started when the third period elapses, or may be an effect started after the third period elapses.
Also,

The fourth effect is an effect that does not start unless the second operation means is operated in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

By doing so, the fifth effect is clearly different from the case where the third operation unit is not operated in the third period even when the third operation unit is not operated. It becomes possible to give a width to the entangled production.
Also,

“The first time is a time after the first time [for example, time for four frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 166 (b)],

The second time is a time after the elapse of a second time [for example, time for five frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 167 (b)],
The second time is a time different from the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
* D2970P

Next, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing three examples of promotion effects.

  In the example shown on the left of FIG. 169, during the decorative display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 16A, the promotion effect is started at the same time as the reach effect is started or after the reach effect is started. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), a display item AT (first display) of a noticeable item appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. 169 (a), it is informed that attention is paid to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the state (“2 ↓ 2”) of the variation display of the decorative pattern in the reach state currently being performed is directly displayed to notify that attention is paid. Next, in FIG. 169 (c), the display item AT to be noted disappears, “decoration 7” is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. A state of being displayed is displayed. The symbol combination (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) in which the same even three decorative symbols are arranged is a normal jackpot symbol combination with no probability change, whereas the same odd ornamental three symbols are arranged. Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with probability variation, it is likely that the promotion with probability variation will be successful here. In the example shown on the left of FIG. 169, the attention object in the display AT of the matter to be noticed and the one that has changed after that match in the decorative design. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 169 (A)) and the actual change display (FIG. 169 (C)) match. In an effect in which a design such as a decorative design changes, a prior notice display related to the design may be configured so that the actual change display always matches.

  In addition, in the display AT of noteworthy items, the state of the variation display of the decoration pattern in the current reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed, but the variation display of the decoration symbol after the change is displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, it is reported that attention is paid to the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons in the display AT of the noticeable matter in the promotion effect. The four icons displayed in the notice item display AT are icons corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a kind of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. 169 (b), it is notified that the rightmost fourth hold icon h4 is noticed among the four hold icons displayed. In addition, in the display item AT for attention shown in FIG. 169 (b), four hold icons are displayed, but no change icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, only the three black circle (default display mode) hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed, but in the variable icon display area 208e, a black circle (default The display mode) variation icon c is displayed. Further, in the display item AT of note shown in FIG. 169 (b), the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 to be watched is changed to the hatched display mode (the first display mode and the display mode of the pre-reading notice). It has changed. Next, in FIG. 169 (c), the attention item display AT disappears in the reach state, and only the three black circle hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed. However, in the variation icon display area 208e, a variation icon c in a hatching display mode (normal notice display mode) is displayed. The display mode of the hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the notice item display AT in FIG. 169 (b). The object (fourth hold icon h4) is different from the object (change icon c) changed thereafter. In other words, in FIG. 169 (b), while the notice of change of the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) is made, the change icon c actually changes in FIG. Are different. In addition, the change icon itself is not displayed on the display item AT of note in FIG. 169 (b), while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Inadvertently, there is an inconsistency that is not displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 169 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)) are inconsistent. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual variation shown in FIG. 169 (c). The icon c corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 169 (c) corresponds to an example of the second display. In FIG. 169 (d), the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” loss is fixedly displayed. In the variation icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (d), the display mode of the variation icon c returns from the hatched display mode to the black circle display. Further, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 169, the display item AT (FIG. 169 (B)) to be noted of the promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, and one of the four displayed icons is displayed. It is reported that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4). Further, the icon to be noted (fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatching display mode (first display mode). This hatching display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively low jackpot reliability. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons h1 to h4 having default display modes and a variation icon c having the same default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number of hold icons is the same between the display AT of the noticeable matter of the promotion effect and the actual hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 169 (C), the display item AT that should be noted disappears while still in the reach state, and only the three hold icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although there is no, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is changed to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. This Tono-sama's face display mode (second display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, notable items (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of noteworthy items and those changed thereafter (first hold icon h1) are not only different, but also the change contents are hatched display modes. The first display mode is different from the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. Note that the fluctuation icon c of the default display mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 169 (C ′) is a modification of FIG. (C), and shows a state where the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. Further, (D ′) in the figure is a diagram showing a state at the time of stop display of the decorative symbols following the figure (C ′). The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 169 (C ′) and (D ′) is the same as the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. The display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in (169) (C ') and (D') is not different from the display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in FIG. FIG. 169 (D ′), which is subsequent to FIG. 169 (D ′), shows a state in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 has been digested and a new variation display of the decorative design has started. FIG. When a new variation display of the decorative symbol is started, a moving animation of the hold icon shift display is executed, and the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 so far moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Displayed as a variation icon c. Further, the hold icon that has been the second hold icon h2 so far is displayed as the first hold icon h1, but at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or at the same time as the end of the movement animation. Or after the movement animation ends, the display mode changes to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) started after the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) in which the notice AT is displayed AT is performed. Promotion display is executed in the second symbol variation display). The first hold icon h1 that has changed to the display mode of the face of Tonosama may be displayed in the display mode during the execution of the second symbol variation display (for example, during the execution of the reach effect), and the display mode also changes. Or it may disappear when the super reach production is performed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 169 also corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 169 (B)) and the actual change display (FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169) do not match.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 169, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in ') corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the noticeable item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. It corresponds to.
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing two other examples relating to the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 170, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed on the hold icon. This mini-icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and a notice of the effect executed in the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is digested or the big hit in the symbol variation display. Represents a pre-read notice. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 170 (A) and (B), the mini icon of A display is placed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 among the three displayed hold icons. Two mA are stacked. For example, the A-displayed mini-icon mA is for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production is started once. In the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 170B, one C-display mini-icon displayed on the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons. It is reported that attention is paid to mC. The C-displayed mini-icon mA is a pre-reading notice that suggests, for example, that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 170 (C), the display item AT that should be noticed disappears while it is still in the reach state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the mini icon mA and C display of the A display on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini-icon changes from the A-display mini-icon mA to the C-display mini-icon mC, but the lower mini-icon does not change, and the A-display mini-icon does not change. The icon mA remains. As a result, while the number of pseudo-continuations decreases from two to one, it is foretold that it will be a symbol variation display that is determined to be a big hit, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the attention object in the display AT of the attention item is a mini icon that displays only one item, but in fact, two mini icons that are displayed after that are displayed, Changes in the first stage mini-icon (C-displayed mini-icon mC) and the first-stage mini-icon (A-displayed mini-icon mA) that were the target of attention in the display AT of the noticeable item The contents are also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 170, the C-display mini-icon mC in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual first-stage A-display mini shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the display AT of the noticeable item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 170C corresponds to an example of the second display.

  In the example on the right side of FIG. 170, the promotion effect selected from the three types of promotion effects is executed in the reach state. The three types of promotion effects here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (c), the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (d), and FIG. 169 (A). (C) or FIG. 169 (A) to (C ′) to the promotion effect shown in FIG. In addition, a plurality of types of effects (here, three types of promotion effects) for which one effect is selected are all displayed in advance as shown in FIG. 169 (a) to FIG. )) And the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)) may be of the same type, or a prior notice display (as shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (d)). 169 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)) may be inconsistent types of effects, or both of the matched type and inconsistent types of effects are included. Also good.

  In FIG. 170 (b), a noticeable item display AT1 labeled “promotion chance A” as promotion effect A, and a noticeable item display AT2 marked “promotion opportunity B” as promotion effect B. As a promotion effect C, a noticeable item display AT3 labeled “promotion chance C” is displayed, and any one type of promotion effect is selected and executed by internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed as if the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137) is operated.

In the above description, the promotion effect has been described as an example. However, the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.
In the above description,
A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,

  One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b), the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (B), and FIG. ), Etc.]

One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the change icon c shown in FIG. 169 (c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E ′). , Mini-icon mA, etc. shown in FIG. 170 (C)]
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,

  The second display may be displayed after the display of the first display starts,

  The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon changes [for example, attention should be given to each of FIGS. 169 (b), 169 (B), and 170 (B). Item display AT, etc.]

The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon is changed [for example, FIG. 169 (c), FIG. 169 (C), FIG. 169 (E ′), FIG. 170 (C), respectively. The actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

The display means may be means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, may be means for displaying the icons, or may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.
Also,

“The second icon [for example, the fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 169 (c)] is a different type of icon from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b)]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
"With symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,

  The first icon is a hold icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b),

The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.

  The second icon is a variation icon [eg, a variation icon c shown in FIG. 169 (c)],

The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display when the hold represented by the suspension icon is digested and the symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed.
Also,

“It is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (B), etc.]

  The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E ′)],

The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.

The first hold icon and the second hold icon are icons having different times when the hold is made.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a pre-reading preview mini icon mC that suggests that it will be a big hit]

The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [e.g., a mini icon mA for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started once],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The second display is a display that is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The second display is a display displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
* D3048P
Next, a timer notice for starting notification with a button effect will be described.
FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining general timer notice.

  In each drawing in FIG. 171, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed beside the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 165 or the like has a circular operation surface, but the button B here has a rectangular operation surface. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137 ′), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be named a chance button.

  In FIG. 171 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 171 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding indications of special Fig. 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 171 (b), the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 171 (b) are lit, and the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3). In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives a special symbol change start command or a special symbol hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol variation start command includes information representing the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started. Moreover, even if the information indicating the variation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. In the special figure hold increase command, when the main control unit 300 prefetches up to the variation time, information indicating the prefetched variation time is included. The first sub-control unit 400 can know the variation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. When the variation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to perform timer notice.

  When the lottery for whether or not to execute the timer notice is won (when the lottery result is a result to be executed), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is a kind of notice effect that suggests that a new effect is started. The new effect here may be a jackpot notice effect or a notice effect as to whether a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect or the like) is started. Note that the jackpot notice effect includes a normal notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the following symbol variation display. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example is a numerical display. In FIG. 171 (d), a timer notice display T is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and it is informed that the remaining time is 30:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (f), a Tono-sama character is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. Note that the variation icon c in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the variation icon display area 208e in FIG. 171 (f). Further, a timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) here is the end of the timer notice. Production. However, the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) can also be viewed as the start effect of a new effect that has been predicted to start with a timer notice. In particular, the timing when the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment when it becomes 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. Alternatively, the timer notice is ended when the time reaches 0:00 seconds, but the timer notice display T may be in a mode that continues to be displayed for a certain period even when a new effect is started.

  In FIG. 171 (f) following FIG. 171 (f), the timer notice display T disappears, but the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed on the change icon display area 208e. A normal notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this normal notice effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, has changed to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit with the symbol change display currently continuing in the reach state Is foretold.

  In FIG. 171 (h), the first effect display (tono character display) also disappears, and the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face continues to be displayed in the change icon display area 208e. continuing. After this, it evolved into a super reach production, and the change icon c disappeared with the hold icon (disappeared), and it was a big hit or lost, and further, it was lost without developing into a super reach production. To do. Even in the case of development to a super reach production, the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may continue to be seen without disappearing.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which a timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the timer advance notice execution lottery is won, internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol or may be before the start of the symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 172, simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display, An internal count is started. The counter timer is set with a count value before starting and is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 172, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 172, a value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal count is started from FIG.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state (operation valid state) where the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received simultaneously with the start of the internal count or immediately after the start. However, even when the operation shifts to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the button A operation promotion notification (for example, initial position display 136X) is also performed. However, the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed in accordance with the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 172, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after a while after the reach effect is started (see FIG. 172 (c)). The timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 171, but is not relevant in this example. Also, the button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Note that the timer notice display T is not displayed even when the button B (the operation button 137 ′) is operated, but it may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (e), a timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time is 20:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is immediately displayed, so that the player starts counting down the remaining time as if the button A is operated. Internally, the countdown of the remaining time starts before the button is operated.

  In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button, but an operation promotion notification that promotes the operation of the button A may be performed. Ends when is operated. Therefore, when a certain period is provided between the time when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the time when the timer notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is not made during that period. Will not be done.

  In addition, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the button A operation, the length of the remaining time at which the display starts is different depending on the timing of the button A operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 172 (A), if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the timer notice display T is displayed from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), even if the button A is operated after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 is less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer warning display is displayed. T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A operation is not performed. May be. In the example shown in FIG. 172, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  Since FIG. 172 (f) and subsequent figures are the same as FIG. 171 (e) and subsequent figures, description thereof is omitted. However, since the button A (first chance button 136) is a back button, the beginner does not press the button A. In some cases, the remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time elapses, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face without performing the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1). Similarly to the case where there is an operation, after the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the back button operation timing and the hold increase timing.

  In FIG. 173 (b), when the symbol variation display is started, the reserved number of the special diagram 1 is 2, and the internal count is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display here. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, it is determined that the timer notice is to be executed, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is enabled.

  In FIG. 173 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In a state where the timer notice display T is displayed (remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in 173 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. These three hold icons h1 to h3 are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 173 (f)), and as shown in FIG. 173 (g), the first effect display (tono-sama character display N1) is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Also, in this example, on the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1), a new effect to be started, that is, a new effect in which the start is announced by the timer notice is suggested, and a pre-read notice is given. It has been reported that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the prefetch notice is also determined in a control manner at the stage of determining whether or not the button notice can be executed. Therefore, if the second hold of special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display currently being performed, the look-ahead notice target is The winning portion after the timer is scheduled to be held for the second time (in this case, the third hold) cannot be subject to the look-ahead notification, but for the player, before the start of the new production It appears that all three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed on the screen are likely to be subject to a pre-reading notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 out of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from a black circle display mode (default display mode) to a ton-like face display mode. The pre-reading notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) continues to be displayed until the currently displayed symbol variation display is completed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173 (c ′), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and the number of holdings in FIG. When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 173 (d) where the number of buttons is increased by one (see FIG. 173 (e ′)), this is a button operation after the increase of the hold. Therefore, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which was increased before the button operation, will also be subject to the pre-reading notice, but the hold increase after the timer notice is decided to run even before the button operation. However, in terms of control, the third hold cannot be a prefetch notice target, and in this example as well, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the prefetch notice display mode.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display that is currently being performed, if the first hold is increased together with the second hold of the special figure 1, the first hold icon h1 There is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and in this case, it is not known in advance whether the prefetch notice target is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  Further, if the control for determining the pre-reading notice target is adopted according to the operation of the button A, the number of the pre-reading notice objects changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 173 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the pre-reading notice, but in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 173 (e ′), from the first hold to the third hold. Will be subject to pre-reading, and the target that can be expected will differ depending on the timing of button operation.

Furthermore, the pre-reading notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing two examples of button effects in stages.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 174 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the reach state is from FIG. 174 (a) to FIG. (D), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 of an image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of “press” are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 174 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state where the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, an image C1 of a cut-in notice displayed as a chance is displayed.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 174 is an example in which the start of timer notice is waited. Since FIG. 174 (A) -FIG. (C) is the same as FIG. 174 (a) -FIG. (C), description is abbreviate | omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer notice is not executed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, each variable time is calculated from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol included in each command. If there is a hold whose fluctuation time is longer than the first time among these three holds, stock the timer notice until the hold is consumed and the symbol change display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 174 (C), when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice is not started in the currently displayed symbol variation display, but thereafter In the symbol change display to be started, as a display for notifying that the timer notice is started, as shown in FIG. When the timer notice starts, the remaining time is displayed instead of “waiting”.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. In FIG. 175, three examples are shown on the left side, and two examples are shown on the right side.

  In FIG. 175 (a) as the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter referred to as a time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T at the button A. (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also displayed with a countdown as time passes, but in FIG. 175 (a), 10:00 seconds are displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 175 (a) is 33:00 seconds, and they do not match. At the timing of FIG. 175 (b) when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and in response to this operation, the time display T1 is displayed. The timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 175 (b), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

  Also in FIG. 175 (A) which is the second example, the time display T1 is displayed at the position where the timer notice display T is displayed, as in the case of FIG. 175 (a) which is the first example. Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 has reached 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 175 (B) is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412. On the timer notice display T, the difference between the time displayed on the time display T1 and the time displayed on the timer notice display T newly displayed is displayed. That is, at the timing of FIG. 175 (B), the time displayed on the time display T1 should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, a difference display T2 of “+20” is made.

  In FIG. 175 (a), which is the third example, the time display T1 is displayed at the position where the timer notice display T is displayed, as in FIG. 175 (a), which is the first example. Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing shown in FIG. 175 (a), and here is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 175 (a), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the characters “LOCK” are displayed so as to overlap the upper portion of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown at the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display “LOCK” is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds of the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display “LOCK” disappears and the time display T1 is replaced with the timer preview display T. Thereafter, the countdown as the timer preview display T is continued. The In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, eventually reaching 0:00 seconds, The process ends without replacing the display T.

  In the fourth example shown in the upper right, FIG. 175 (α), an arrow indicating the passage of time is displayed, indicating a state in which the symbol variation is being displayed. In general, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. In addition, when the timer notice notifies the start of the final cut-in notice in the current symbol variation display, the longer the timer notice execution time (remaining time), the longer the various notices are executed. Is possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-continuation. In addition, after the normal reach is started, the development to super reach (SP) and the effect of changing the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a chance-up production during the reach that raises the expectation of the big hit. For these reasons, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed internally, but the display of the remaining time in the timer notice display T is initially displayed slightly, and the countdown is temporarily displayed. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved by stopping or adding the remaining period later. In addition, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. There are cases where the interest of the game is improved. In the final cut-in notice, a character that is determined to be a big hit is made to appear. Note that even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds when the counter timer 412 becomes 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to make a false timer notice.

  In FIG. 175 (a), which is the fifth example shown in the lower right, the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here In this case, a timer notice display T displaying “30:00 seconds” is displayed. In FIG. 175 (i), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in the second mode (for example, a double frame). Note that the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example in a case where the timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

  Two examples are shown in FIG. 176, and the example shown above is an example in which the timer notice overlaps with the island simultaneous performance. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a), “25 seconds until the simultaneous island effect” is displayed large. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 176 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed to the left of the variable icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (b), “20 seconds until the simultaneous production of islands” is displayed in the same size as before. In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer notice becomes 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous effect is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer notice is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous effect. The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412 without receiving any.

The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 176 is an example in the case where the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a), the mission display M is displayed on the upper right side of the variation icon display area 208e, indicating that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 176 (a), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed to the left of the variable icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 176 (a), it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display form surrounded by a single frame, so there is a risk of misunderstanding at first glance. It also has the effect of being viewed.
FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating another example of timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 177, the timer notice display is not a numerical display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red. And urge you to operate. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (b) has a tutorial description about the display of a chance up meter which is a kind of timer notice display. In FIG. 177 (c), the button A is operated in response to the red lighting, and the chance display meter 208 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation. The chance up meter CM has a start S at the left end and a goal G at the right end, and the arrow mark moves from left to right as time elapses. This arrow mark represents the current time point, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Further, this chance up meter CM not only shows the remaining time, but also shows various changes such as a pseudo-ream and hold icon change, reach title color change effect, and a chance up effect during reach as shown in FIG. 175 (α). The execution timing of the production is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the production is marked, and it may be hidden until what kind of production is executed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 177 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red, prompting the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N is marked with a mark JI. When the remaining period meter reaches the mark JI and operates the button A, a special mode effect is produced. Be started. In FIG. 177 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow, and the special mode effect is not started. As shown in FIG. 177 (B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the chance is displayed. Has been. In FIG. 177 (a), the operation timing of the button A matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 177 (a), an image C2 of the cut-in notice displayed in gray letters with the chance is displayed. ing. The cut-in notice image C2 shown in FIG. 177 (a) differs from the cut-in notice image C1 shown in FIG. 177 (B) in that the typeface and background of the character are the same and only the character color is different. Different types of fonts and backgrounds may be used, or images such as characters may be added. In FIG. 177 (A), the button B (operation button 137 ′) for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to a back button. The operation timing of the button B is also in time with the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 177 (i), a special cut-in notice image C3 in which a princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operating means to be operated. In addition, the display type of an effect is not restricted, and the kind and start timing of an effect may differ. Further, even when the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether or not the button is the back button.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209 ′ with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. A panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 128 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209 ′. In the timer notice display means 209 ′ with shutter shown in FIG. 178 (a), the shutter is closed, and the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated as shown in FIG. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209 ′.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 ′ becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed not on the timer notice display means 209 ′ but on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the decorative symbol display device. In the variation icon display area 208e of 208, the variation icon c changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and the normal notice effect is started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 ′ continues to display 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A) displays the same display as “standby” shown in FIG. 174 (D). “Standing” shown in FIG. 174 (D) is a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol variation display started after this, but “waiting” shown in FIG. This corresponds to a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. In FIG. 178 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 ′ is opened, and the remaining time set to the counter timer 412 not shown here is the same as the remaining time. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The cancellation of “waiting” may be canceled automatically when the cancellation time comes, or may be canceled by operating the button A or the button B again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a), the timer is in the reach state, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (25:00 seconds in this case) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. A notice display T is displayed. In the timer advance notice display means 209 ′, the shutter is opened and the characters “chance” are displayed. As described above, the timer notice display unit 209 ′ can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208. Instead, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (here, 20:00 seconds) is replaced with the timer notice display means 209 ′. Is displayed. In this way, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped by the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178 (a), the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209 ′. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 ′ displays 24:95 seconds, both of which are not shown in the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although the remaining time is supposed to be displayed, there is a slight difference. This is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ′, so that some time lag occurs in display control and the like, and this is a difference caused by this time lag. Note that a difference may be intentionally generated as part of the production between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ′.

Here, the timer notice display means 209 ′ is used here, but instead of the timer notice display means 209 ′, the second display means 209 capable of operation (up and down) shown in FIG. 160 may be used. The second display means 209 may always operate (elevate), may not operate (elevate), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or performs only the elevating operation. It may be a thing.
In the above description,
“Second operation means [for example, chance button 136 etc.]

Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209 ′, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is configured to display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [eg, timer notice display T, etc.]

The third display is a display corresponding to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 172 (e), 25:00 shown in FIG. ) And the cut-in notice image C1 displayed in black letters and the chance and the special-form cut-in notice image C displayed in gray letters shown in FIG. 177]. Display
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is equal to or less than the first remaining time or the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 177. Display mode [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 172 (e), non-display shown in FIG. 172 (a), or chance and cut-in notice shown in black characters shown in FIG. 177 (B)] The display may start with the image C1 and the chance C shown in FIG. 177 (a) and the special-cut-in notice image C displayed in gray characters.

Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, may not display, may display other than a plurality of types of display, or may display a plurality of types of display. May be displayed.
Also,
'One of the plural types of displays is a fourth display,

  The fourth display is a display that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, a normal display 136N of an operation promotion notification, etc.]

  When the second operation means is operated, the display of the third display is started [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period], and when the display is not started [for example, the operation valid period In the case of an operation before or after the operation valid period elapses, etc.]

In the second case, the fourth display is a display that is not displayed during the period from when the second operation means is operated until the display of the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.
Also,
‘The first notice display is a timer notice display,

  The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like] indicating a first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like]

  After the first remaining time becomes zero, a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect in which the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. 172 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess's face, or FIG. 173 (g) Pre-read notice effect etc. in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.

The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the notice effect is started.
Also,

“The notice effect is a notice related to the symbol variation display performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. Is a regular notice that changes to the aspect, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

More specifically, as the notice effect, a so-called pseudo-ream effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect [for example, a super reach effect, etc.], or an improvement in the expectation of a big hit in the reach effect is suggested. Such as a change in the character color of a title or dialogue, a cut-in effect [for example, a cut-in effect just before the symbol stops], or the like.
Also,
'One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing the number of holds depending on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.

The advance notice effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode [for example, the pre-read that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Notice production etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The display means may always display a display indicating the number of reservations, may not display it, may display other than the number of reservations, or displays only the number of reservations. You may do.
Also,

“When the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the held icons representing the number of held icons before increasing is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. [For example, the change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 173 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the hold icons is displayed. The display mode of a plurality of hold icons may be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.
Also,

“When the number of holdings increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the holding icons representing the number of holdings after the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice May change to,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or a plurality of hold icons among the plurality of hold icons. May be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.
Also,

“One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, time display T1 shown in FIG. 175, etc.]

The sixth display includes a display including a display representing a second remaining time different from a display representing the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 175 (b)] [for example, 5:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 175 (b)]
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
[Counting means [for example, counter timer 412 etc.]

The display representing the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the symbol display means [for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing the symbol variation display, the first control means [eg, the main control unit 300, etc.], and the second Control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400], the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is control means that can control the symbol display means [for example, control means that executes a special symbol state update process], and the second control means is control of the display means [for example, , Production control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be a means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means constituted by a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402, the VDP 434, the VRAM 436, etc.].

The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed. The second control unit may be a unit that always executes control according to a command from the first control unit, or may be a unit that may execute the control. Other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.
Also,

“The third display indicates that the operation timing of the second operation means matches the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 177, etc.] A display that starts to be displayed in a display mode [for example, a special mode displayed in gray letters with a chance shown in FIG.

The third display is displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the chance and black characters shown in FIG. 177 (B) when the operation timing of the second operation means does not coincide with the first timing. The display starts with the cut-in preview image C1 etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

[Third operation means [for example, button B (operation button 137 ′) shown in FIG.

The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the third operation means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. Display of the image C3 of the cut-in notice of].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,

“It is provided with a third display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a variable display of decorative symbols,

The display means [for example, timer notice display means 209 ′ etc.] is a separate means from the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The third display means may or may not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may execute other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Only the variation display of the decorative design may be executed.
Also,

“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
* D3049P

  Finally, an example in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively start changing will be described.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing step-by-step how the decorative symbol is changed and displayed in which the animation of the hold icon is executed.

  In FIG. 179 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disparity “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 179 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle hold icons, which are hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows a state immediately after the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variable display) is continuously started in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. While only two of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 179 (b) are lit, there are three hold icons (hold icon) in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. h1 to h3) are displayed, and the fluctuation icon is not yet displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is a result of a time lag that occurs because it is immediately after the start of fluctuation. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (c), the movement animation of the hold icon is started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then moves diagonally to the lower right, and the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until now moves toward the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2 so far, moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 is displayed, and the hold icon which has been the third hold icon h3 so far is the second hold icon h2. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 179 (d), the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

  Here, there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. Are lit. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts an increase animation of the hold icon. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (e), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen.

  Also in FIG. 179 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon continues and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 179 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation is finished, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 179 (h), the stop symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth figure 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a stop display (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. In 208e, the variation icon c still remains. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 179 (i), the final display of the stop symbol of the losing is performed, and the decoration design display device 208 also displays “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative pattern of the lost is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c is also disappeared.

  In FIG. 179 (j) to FIG. 11 (l), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is performed, in the same figure (m), the stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Here, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed.

  179 (a) to (n) described above are the castle town stage, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the street of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. At the same time as the symbol variation display of the next special symbol 1 is started in the diagram (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image as a mesh. It changes temporarily to a background image in which a princess character is displayed at the center of the tone background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to a stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon that has been displayed, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the variation icon c itself disappear, and the variation display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition to being displayed, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are only displayed on the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 179 (p), the background image is switched to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, the castle town stage has been switched to the darkness stage. When the stage change is completed, the hold icon, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the display of the variation icon c itself are restored, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right This is performed in the symbol display area 208c. In the castle town stage, the hold icon or the change icon whose default display mode is a round shape becomes a square display mode in the dark stage, and the black square first hold icon h1 is shown in FIG. 179 (p). Similarly, a black square variation icon c is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may change depending on the stage. In addition, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol may be changed according to the stage.

  The stages described above have multiple stages in addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage, and stage changes according to the control state (eg, probabilistic state / non-probable state, electric support state / non-electric support state) Or a stage change is performed according to the number of symbol fluctuation displays.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon while the symbol is stopped.

  During the symbol variation of Special Figure 1, after the movement animation is completed, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is increased by one to three. In other words, the third hold is increased here. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 180 (b) is increased by one and is lit three. Further, although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180B has three hold icons h1. ~ H3 is displayed. The increased third hold is subject to a pre-reading notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (black circle display mode) during the symbol variation of FIG. 180 (b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted, but unless otherwise specified, the increase animation is executed.

  In FIG. 180 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (d) to FIG. The combination of is displayed. During this fixed display, the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) increased during the symbol variation display is executed. In this effect, the display mode of the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h2) displayed when the third hold is increased is changed together with the increased third hold icon h3. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 180 (d) are all black circle display modes (default display modes), but in FIG. 180 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the effect display e4 overlaps these three hold icons h1 to h3, so that the three hold icons h1 to h3 cannot be visually recognized for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 180 (f), all the three hold icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode of the face of the lord (the display mode of the pre-reading notice). The change in the display mode here is simultaneous and the same change in the display mode. However, the display mode may change one by one or may change to a different display mode (hereinafter referred to as “display mode”). The same applies to the simultaneous changes described.)

  In FIG. 180 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 180 (h), the hold icon of the display style of Tonosama's face has started moving animation. Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the display mode of the face of the Tono-sama is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the form of the face of Tonosama are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 180, the period from the start of symbol change to the end of the hold icon movement animation corresponds to an example of the first period. If there is an increase in hold during the first period, An effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed within one period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period immediately before FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the period during the fixed display (FIGS. 180 (d) to (f)). Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when there is a hold increase while the symbol is stopped.

  In FIG. 181 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. (D) to (f), the decorative pattern of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” is lost. The combination of is displayed. Since the fixed display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, the fixed display is also referred to as the stop display. During the stop display, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, the third hold is also increased here. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 180 (f) is increased by one and is lit three. The third hold increased here is also subject to the pre-reading notice. In the case of the increase of the hold during the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation is cancelled. However, only a part of the increase animation may be executed, or the whole may be executed.

  In FIG. 181 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. It becomes invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 increases as shown in FIG. 181 (g). The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the display mode of the Tono-sama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, both of which have been displayed in black circles (default display mode) so far, are the display modes of the Tono-sama face (display mode of the pre-reading notice) Are changing at the same time. That is, all of the three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the face display mode (display mode of the pre-reading notice). In FIG. 181 (g), the symbol variation display is started, and the subsequent processing is the same as the example in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, and the simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased hold icon is displayed. In other words, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the hold increase or with the hold increase.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases by two during the symbol variation.

  From FIG. 182 (a) to FIG. 18 (c), the symbols are changing. Among them, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. 182 (b) after the movement animation ends. The number of holdings in FIG. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and this third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the prefetch notice execution lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 182 (b) is increased by one and is turned on three, and the third hold icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased to increase the three hold icons. h1 to h3 are displayed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 182 (c) thereafter, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is further increased to 4 (full tank). That is, the fourth hold is increased here, but as a result of the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, the fourth holding is not subject to the pre-reading notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 182 (c) is increased by one and turned on, and the fourth hold icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, thereby increasing the four hold icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 182 (d) to (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, the simultaneous change effect is executed as the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice increased during the symbol variation display, and the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 182 (f). After the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize, the effect display e4 disappears and the hold icon display resumes as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold) that has already been displayed when the third hold increases, together with the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode of the Tonosama's face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold is increased is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the black circle display mode (default display mode) remains unchanged. Thus, even if it is a simultaneous change effect, not all displayed hold icons change.

  Even in this example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the hold icon movement animation is equivalent to an example of the first period. Simultaneous change production is performed within the period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period from FIG. 182 (a) to immediately before FIG. (D)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the stop display period (FIGS. 182 (d) to (g)).

  Also, the first half of the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, the period before the start of reach production) is the first period, and the second half of the period until the end of the variable display (for example, the first period). The period of the latter half portion following (2) may be the second period. Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  Further, the first period may be a period from the start of display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, the period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e. It may be a period until one of a plurality of decorative symbols temporarily stops (so-called first stop or first temporary stop in pseudo-continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of variable display May be a period until the reach state is reached.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases by 2 while the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 183 (c) to FIG. 10 (g) show that the symbol is stopped, and among these, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. Increases by 1 to 3. In other words, the third hold is increased here, and this third hold becomes the target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 183 (f) is increased by one and three lights are turned on, but the effect display e4 appears in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding icon The entire display area 208f is difficult to visually recognize. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase of the third hold is cancelled.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 183 (g), there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is further increased to four (full tank). In other words, the fourth hold is increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect that is the prefetch notice effect, but the fourth hold is not a target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 183 (g) are increased by one and are lit four, but the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold is held. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the fourth hold is also canceled.

  In FIG. 183 (h), the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (h), the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display form), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon are displayed. The icon h2 also changes to the display mode of the Tonosama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold has increased is a black circle display mode. (Default display mode). In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as a pre-reading notice effect. However, if there is an increase in hold during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, the hold The increase is excluded, and the hold icon before the simultaneous change effect is executed is changed all at once. While the symbols are stopped, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately when the special figure hold increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the start of the simultaneous change effect, the third hold If it is the target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, if the fourth hold is a target of the prefetch notice, the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in FIG. 183 (f) and FIG. 10 (g), the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect that is the pre-reading notice effect is reserved. An icon increase animation may be performed. In FIG. 183 (f ′), as with FIG. 183 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect accompanying the fact that the third hold is a prefetch notice target, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed. It has become difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since it is after the start of the simultaneous change effect, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 183 (g1 ′), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is behind the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. 183 (g1 ′) following FIG. 183 (g1 ′), an increase hold icon hi having a black circle display mode partially hidden by the effect display e4 is shown.

As an increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold, an increase hold icon hi in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) may be displayed together with the effect display e4.
Next, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon in the winning order variation machine will be described.

  The explanation so far has been the explanation in the special figure 2 priority fluctuation. That is, it was an explanation of the increase in the holding of the special figure 1 in the case where the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 is given priority. Note that the same holds true for the increase in suspension in FIG.

Here, about the case of the winning order variation machine which starts the symbol variation display from the winning timing among the winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the winning at the second special figure starting port 232. explain.
FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining winning order variation.

  In the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The variation icon display area 208e is provided in the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 184 (a), six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. All of these six hold icons h1 to h6 are in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 184 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol variation, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. Here, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179 is executed, but the illustration is omitted. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIGS. 184 (c) to (d)). In this example, the simultaneous change effect of the losing and holding icon is not started in the lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice for the seventh holding is executed.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 184 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179 (c) is started. In FIG. Is completed, and a variation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the hold increases due to change in winning order.

  In FIG. 185 (a), seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. All of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 are in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 185 (a) is a state after the end of the moving animation.

  In FIG. 185 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change after the moving animation ends, and the eighth holding icon h8 is added to the holding icon display area 208f, and the holding becomes full. In this way, a full display F as a pending MAX is also made. In this example, the lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice for the eighth hold is won, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is executed thereafter.

  Eventually, the symbol variation ends, and the stop display is in progress (FIGS. 185 (c) to (d)). In this example, during the stop display, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is consumed, and as shown in FIG. 185 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the holding icon described with reference to FIG. 179 (c) is started. In FIG. 185 (g), the movement of the holding icon is started. Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and a change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode) regardless of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the variation icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the moving animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears, but the effect display e5 here is a display that overlaps the variable icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f, as shown in FIG. 185 (h). In addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the fluctuation icon c is also difficult to visually recognize. In the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 185 (h), the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed does not overlap, but may overlap to this position. Further, an effect display that does not overlap the variation icon display area 208e may be used.

  In FIG. 185 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon can be visually recognized, and the variation icon c can also be visually recognized. The simultaneous change effect here was a look-ahead notice targeting the eighth hold at the time of increase in hold (FIG. 185 (b)). In the first place, the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed. Accordingly, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the fluctuation icon c are displayed, and the display mode of all these displayed icons is changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display mode is not changed to one type of common display mode, but is changed to a plurality of types of display mode. In addition, the display mode of all the held icons that have been changed simultaneously may be different.

  Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. FIG. 185 (d ′) is stopped and displayed as in FIG. 185 (d). In FIG. 185 (e ′), as in FIG. 185 (e), the special symbol variation display is started and the decorative symbol display is started. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the previous example, the hold icon moving animation is started immediately after this, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display or immediately after the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Simultaneous change production has been started. In FIG. 185 (f ′), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are displayed, and all these displayed icons are displayed. Icon display has changed

  FIG. 186 is a diagram illustrating an example when the hold increases during the stop display in the winning order fluctuation and the full reserve is reached.

  186 (a)-(b), a stop display is performed, and there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing between (a) and (b). 1, the number of holds increases by 1 and the number of holds becomes 8 (full tank) For the increase in hold during the stop display, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, as shown in FIG. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 increases by 1 and lights up four, and the eighth hold icon h8 of the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased. 185, the full tank display F described with reference to Fig. 185 is not displayed, that is, the full tank display F is displayed only while the symbol is changing. Is short and the full tank display F is In this way, the next symbol variation display is started without displaying the full display F (see FIG. 186 (c)), and although not shown, the movement animation of the hold icon is omitted. After that, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started, and the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 186 (d)). In FIG. (E), the effect display e5 disappears and the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all these redisplayed icons is changed.

  Note that the full tank display F may be displayed during the stop display even for a short time. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Furthermore, if the number of holdings does not increase during symbol variation or the holding full state is not reached, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icon may not be started.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the hold icon being displayed.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 187, in FIG. 187 (b), the second hold icon h2 changes to a hold icon in the display mode (second display mode) of the characters “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a prefetch notice with the highest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. The rare display mode with the lowest appearance rate may be used. Even if the hold increases while the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 187, in FIG. 187 (B), the second hold icon h2 is changed to the hold icon of the display mode (first display mode). This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a pre-read notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed at the same time. The display mode having the next highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. When the hold increases in the state where the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 187 (C)), if the increased hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice, simultaneous change An effect is executed (see FIG. 187 (E)).

  FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating a simultaneous change effect when the full reserve state is reached in the winning order variation.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 188 (a) is changed to the display mode of the longest character. The third hold icon h3 has a display mode changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, a case where a character with the longest character appears from the beginning at the time of winning a prize, or a case where the display mode of the character with the longest character is changed at the start of the next change. In FIG. 188 (d), the eighth on-hold icon h8 increases during symbol variation, and the on-hold full tank is reached. If the reserve full tank is reached during symbol fluctuation, the full tank display F is changed from the time when the tank is full to the stop display of the current symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 188 (c) to (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the full display F disappears when the confirmation display is obtained. And even if the display mode of the hold icon is changed due to other effects, when the hold full tank is reached, after the hold icon moving animation (see FIG. 188 (g)) in the next change is finished, As shown in 188 (i), a simultaneous change effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 8 (j), the display modes of all icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon c change. . In this example, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. 187 (a) to (e), the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the hold full state being reached. . Accordingly, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 188 (a) is the display mode of the character of the longest number, but even if it is the display mode of the characters “heat” shown in FIG. 187 (b), When the reserve is full, simultaneous change effects are executed. However, even if the reserve is full, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed if the hold icon in the display form (second display form) of the characters “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 188 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 has already changed to the display mode of the face of Tono-sama due to the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full tank display F is displayed when the reserved full tank is reached during the symbol fluctuation. Even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again in response to the fact that the tank is full (see FIG. 188 (C)). In other words, if the reserved icon whose display mode has been changed by the simultaneous change effect becomes full before all the held icons are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

In addition, the example of the winning order variation machine described in FIGS. 185, 186, and 188 can be applied to the case where the reserve full tank is reached even in the case of the special figure 2 priority variation machine or the alternate variation machine. It is an example.
In the above description,

“A game machine provided with effect display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], wherein the effect display means is capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons, and the effect display means sets the number of holds. The display unit can display a variable number of decorative symbols [e.g., immediately before FIGS. 179 (b) to (h)]. The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, one effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display, and the first effect display is The display of the plurality of held icons is an effect display that changes, and the first effect display is a first period in the variable display [for example, the movement animation of the hold icon ends after the start of symbol variation Period If the first effect display is not started in the first period in the variable display, the second period in the variable display [e.g. 180 (a) to the period immediately before FIG. 180 (c), the period immediately before FIG. 182 (a) to FIG. 180 (d)], the first effect display is not started to be displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is a period after the first period. ]
Explained.

  The “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively change” may be an effect display in which the display modes of all of the plurality of held icons change all at once, or an effect display that changes one by one. It may be an effect display that changes by a plurality.

  Further, for example, when the number of suspensions increases during the first period, the first effect display may be started during the first period. In addition, when the hold increases during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started during the first period in the variable display started following the stop display of the decorative symbol. There is a case.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying a plurality of hold icons without fail, means for displaying the hold icons, or displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

  Further, “the first period is a period [for example, the first half of the period including FIG. 179 (b)] whose start is the start of the variable display, and the second period is the end A gaming machine characterized by being a period [for example, a period of the latter half until immediately before FIG. 179 (h)] at the end of the variable display. ”Was also explained.

  For example, when the display of the first effect is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect is not started during the display of the variable display. In other words, the display of the first effect is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.

In addition, “the game table, wherein the end of the first period is the start of the second period. ]
Also explained.

  Further, “the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol, and the first effect display is displayed when the display is started during the display of the stop display [for example, FIG. ) Or the case shown in FIG. 182 (f), etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  For example, when the suspension increases during the display of the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display. Further, even when the hold increases during the display of the variable display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol without fail, or may be a means for displaying the display of the decorative symbol, or may display other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, “the first effect display is displayed when the number of holdings increases during the display of the variable display and starts to be displayed after the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 182 (f), etc.] is a presentation display with a certain effect display. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect display is the first period in the variable display that is started next to the variable display in which the number of holds increased (hereinafter referred to as“ first variable display ”) [for example, A game table, which is an effect display that may be displayed during the first half of the period including FIG. 185 (h). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the number of the plurality of hold icons whose display modes change according to the first effect display is the number before the increase of the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, FIG. An example of a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  “One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display, and the second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 179 (k)”. The game table, wherein the moving animation is an animation in which display is completed before the second period is started. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, the display mode in which the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, the display mode of the characters “heat” of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the icon, the first effect display is configured to start displaying during the first period, and the plurality of hold When at least one hold icon of the second display mode is included in the icon, the first effect display is not started to be displayed even during the first period. , A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The first display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode. Is different from the jackpot reliability (expected degree), the second display mode may be a display mode having a higher jackpot reliability (expected degree) than the first display mode, Conversely, a low display mode may be used.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display form.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display form.

  In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.],” a gaming table. ”Was also explained.

  It should be noted that “the game stand provided with the effect display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.], wherein the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons, and the effect display means The number of the hold icons corresponding to the number can be displayed, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, and one effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is: It is a first effect display, the first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of held icons are changed, and the first effect display is a first period [for example, symbol variation When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period, the display may be started in the period until the moving animation of the hold icon is completed after the start of the display. The first effect display is also performed in the second period [for example, the period immediately before FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c), the period immediately before FIG. 182 (a) to FIG. The game table is also configured so that the display is not started, and the second period is a period after the first period. "

  Furthermore, “a game machine having an effect display means, wherein the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons, and the effect display means displays a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a fluctuating display of a decorative symbol, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of a decorative symbol, and the effect display means includes: , Means for displaying a plurality of types of effect display, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display, and the first effect display is the plurality of hold icons The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display, and the first effect display is the variation display. Display starts during execution If it is not an effect display that there is, and also describes the gaming table. "Characterized in that.

Further, “the first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display when the suspension increase is performed during the execution of the stop display, and the first effect display. Is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the variable display when the holding increases during the variable display.
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

  136 to 188 described above may be examples of a single pachinko machine or may be executed by different pachinko machines.

  FIG. 189 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 189, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 128 are not provided.

  The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. FIG. 190 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 190), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by sticking this belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. 190 includes three reels in the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 190) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  190, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). In addition, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, the display panel 1070 displaying the device titles and the like is moved back and forth around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower portion, like the transmission unit 191 shown in FIG. It can be rotated in the direction. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 190 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 has been rotated forward, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.
In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

  (Additional remark 1) It is the game machine provided with the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means, Comprising: It is comprised so that execution of multiple types of effects is possible, and one of the multiple types of effects is said. The effect is a first effect, and is configured such that the first effect can be started in response to an operation of the first operation means, and the first effect is being executed. A gaming table, wherein the second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”). The first effect may be a notice effect. The second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a small operating means.

  (Additional remark 2) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1, Comprising: Said 1st state is a state in the whole period when said 1st production is performed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (Additional remark 3) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1 or 2, Comprising: One effect of the said multiple types of effects is a 2nd effect, and said 2nd operation means is in a 2nd period. When operated, the second effect is started, and even when the second operation means is operated, the second effect may not be started. An operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.

  (Additional remark 4) It is a game stand of Additional remark 3, Comprising: Also in the state (henceforth "the 2nd state") of at least one part in the state where said 2nd production is performed, the above-mentioned. A gaming machine, wherein the second operating means is configured to vibrate, and the first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.

  (Additional remark 5) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remark 1 thru | or 4, Comprising: When said 1st effect is started when said 1st operation means is operated within a 1st period, The first operation may not be started even when the first operation means is operated, and the second operation means is configured so that the second operation means is within the first period. A game table characterized by being an operation means that may vibrate when the operation means is operated. That is, the second operating means may vibrate even when the first effect is not executed.

  (Additional remark 6) It is a game stand of Additional remark 5, Comprising: It is comprised so that execution of several types of alerting | reporting is possible, One alerting | reporting of the said multiple types alerting | reporting is 1st alerting | reporting, The said 1st The game machine is characterized in that the one notification is a notification prompting the user to operate the first operation means, and the first notification is configured to be performed within the first period. In other words, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated in a state where the first notification is being executed.

  (Additional remark 7) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1 thru | or 6, Comprising: One effect of the said multiple types of effects is a 3rd effect, Operation of said 1st operation means Accordingly, the first effect and the third effect can be started, and the third effect is executed in the state where the third effect is being executed. A game table characterized in that the second operation means is configured not to vibrate.

  (Additional remark 8) It is a game stand as described in any one of Additional remarks 1 thru | or 7, Comprising: Said 1st production is an effect which can be started even if said 1st operation means is a non-operation state. A characteristic game stand.

  (Supplementary note 9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary note 10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. In addition, even if it is a structural requirement contained only in each description of each example and supplementary note demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to another example and supplementary note.

<Structure>
Next, the “structure” according to the present invention will be described. The “structure” according to the present invention is one or a plurality of members included in the game table (the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, etc.), and is fixed to the game table. It is a concept that includes a member that can be moved relative to the game table, a member that can be attached to and detached from the game table, and the like. In addition, the “structure” according to the present invention is a member that can transmit light from the light emitting means described later, and at least a part thereof is made of a transparent or translucent member or the like, or an opening is formed. It is a member. In the present specification, the “structure” according to the present invention may be referred to as an Nth (N is a positive integer) structure (for example, a first structure, a second structure,...). is there.

  As an example of the “structure” according to the present invention, a first structure 712b shown in FIG. 21A, a fourth structure 712a shown in FIG. 21B, and a third structure shown in FIG. 712c, the second structure body 712d, the first structure body 731 and the second structure body 732 shown in FIG. 40, the first structure body 761 and the second structure body 762 shown in FIG. 49, and the first structure body 732 shown in FIG. One structural body 771 and second structural body 772, the first structural body 821 and the second structural body 822 shown in FIG. 51, the first structural body 831 and the second structural body 832 shown in FIG. , The unfolding combination 712 shown in FIG. 20, the rising combination unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, the launching combination unit 800 shown in FIG. 24, the V forming combination unit 850 shown in FIG. 26, the center combination 900 shown in FIG. The structure of the accessory 900, the game ball shown in FIG. One of the movable stage 244, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 2, a transparent game board having game nails, a lamp cover, a lens, a film, a magic mirror, a decorative panel, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. One, multiple, or all are applicable.

<Light emitting means>
Next, the “light emitting means” according to the present invention will be described. The “light emitting means” according to the present invention is a means capable of emitting light, and includes a means capable of emitting light (for example, an LED) or a means capable of emitting light. And other means (for example, a substrate provided with an LED, an accessory provided with an LED) and the like. In the present specification, the “light emitting means” according to the present invention may be referred to as an Mth (M is a positive integer) light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means,...). is there.

  As an example of the “light emitting means” according to the present invention, the second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A, the first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 21B, and the light emitting substrate shown in FIG. 28, the third light emitting means provided on the back side of 714, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28, the illumination substrate, the LED, the dot matrix display device, the seven segment display device, the organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, the reel (drum) ) Type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, lamp, backlight of liquid crystal display device, backlight of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. .

<Drive means>
Next, the “driving means” according to the present invention will be described. The “driving means” according to the present invention is a means capable of operating (moving, rotating, vibrating, etc.) a structure, light emitting means, etc. by driving, such as a driving source itself (for example, a driving motor) , A concept including means including a drive source (for example, a drive unit including a drive motor and a solenoid). In the present specification, the “driving means” according to the present invention may be referred to as an L-th (L is a positive integer) driving means (for example, a first driving means, a second driving means,...). is there.

  Examples of “driving means” according to the present invention include a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 6, a left vertical drive unit 704 and a right vertical drive unit 706 shown in FIG. 18, and a left drive motor 704b and a right drive motor 706b shown in FIG. 20, one or more or all of the left rotation drive unit 712e and the right rotation drive unit 712f shown in FIG. 20, the drive unit 754, the solenoid, the stepping motor, etc. shown in FIG.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 1>
FIG. 191 is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to the first embodiment. In FIG. 191, the front, back, up, and down arrows respectively indicate that the right side of the page is the front (front side) of the game table, the left side of the page is the back (back side) of the game table, and the upper side of the page is the game. It is above the table (upper surface side), and the lower side of the drawing is below the game table (bottom surface side) (the same applies to other drawings).

  The game table according to the present example includes a first structure ST11, a first light emitting means LM11, a second light emitting means LM12, and a driveable first driving means DM11 (not shown). Configured. The first light emitting means LM11 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM11, and the second light emitting means LM12 is the first driving means LM12. Means that do not move when the means DM11 is driven (fixed means or means that can be moved by driving means other than the first drive means DM11).

  When the first light emitting means LM11 looks at the first light emitting means LM11 from the first position (for example, the front (front side) of the game table) shown in FIG. When the first structure ST11 is positioned at a position overlapping the first structure ST211), the first structure ST11 transmits the light from the first light emitting means LM11 and the light from the second light emitting means LM12. Both can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM11 and the light from the second light emitting means LM12 through the first structure ST11. It is possible.

  On the other hand, when the first light emitting means LM11 sees the first light emitting means LM11 from the second position shown in FIG. 191 (b) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM11. When the LM11 is positioned at a position where the LM11 is not overlapped with the first structure ST11), the first structure ST11 transmits the second light emission without transmitting the light from the first light emitting means LM11. Only light from the means LM12 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the second light emitting means LM12 through the first structure ST11, and the first light emitting means LM11. Can be visually recognized without passing through the first structure ST11 (or when the light from the first light emitting means LM11 is outside the range of view of the player PL, the first The light from the light emitting means LM11 is not visible).

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first driving means DM11 (not shown), and one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”), for example, the first driving means DM11 shown in FIG. The light emitting means LM11 is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means.” For example, FIG. The second light emitting means LM12 shown is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”). For example, the first structure ST11 shown in FIG. Is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means. It is a game table to play.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of decorative covers (for example, the decorative part 902 of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28). First light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, the light-emitting substrate 904 shown in FIG. 28 or FIG. 29) and second light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, the second light-emitting means (of the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700) shown in FIG. A light emitting board 714) of one structure 712b, wherein the first light emitting means is a non-movable means, and the second light emitting means is a movable means. And the player can visually recognize the light from the first light emitting means through the first decorative cover of the plurality of decorative covers, and the light from the second light emitting means through the first decorative cover. The player can see the front A first part of the first decorative cover (for example, a part of the first part 902a of the decorative portion 902 shown in FIG. 29) is a part through which light from the first light emitting means passes, and the first part A second part of the decorative cover (for example, another part of the first part 902a of the decorative portion 902 shown in FIG. 29) is a part through which light from the second light emitting means passes, and the first part The decorative cover includes two or more decorative covers (for example, the decorative portion 902 of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28, the decorative portion 200a4 shown in FIG. 14, the first rising accessory decorative portion 756d shown in FIG. 23, etc.). And a third part (for example, a second part 902b shown in FIG. 28) of the first decorative cover. ) Is a portion of the first light emitting means that does not transmit light. There, the third part of the first decoration cover is a portion opaque to light of the second light emitting means, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine of this example, one first decorative cover can be caused to emit light by the light from the first light emitting means that cannot move and the light from the second light emitting means that can move. In addition to making it possible to produce a variety of effects, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production more than before, and even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means fails, the first In some cases, the effect of the decorative cover can be maintained, and the player's interest can be avoided.

  It should be noted that the lower end of the second light emitting means may be located above the lower end of the first decorative cover. Further, the second light emitting means may be a means positioned rearward of the first light emitting means. The first decorative cover is a non-movable decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28), and the first light emitting means is located behind the first decorative cover. It may be a means provided in. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the second light emitting means (for example, the falling and unfolding accessory shown in FIG. 28) is passed without passing through the first decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900). 712) may be visible to the player. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), at least a part of the second light emitting means (for example, the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the first position is the first decorative cover. (For example, it may be overlapped with the decorative cover of the center object 900). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the second light emitting means (for example, the drop-deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the second position is connected to the first decorative cover (for example, the center). A means that does not overlap the decorative cover of the accessory 900 may be used.

<Structure and Light Emitting Unit / Example 2-1>
FIG. 192 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 2-1. The game table according to the present example includes a first structure ST211, a first light emitting unit LM21, a second light emitting unit LM22, and a driveable first driving unit DM21 (not shown). Configured. The first light emitting means LM21 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM21, and the second light emitting means LM22 is the first driving means LM22. Means that are not moved by the driving of the means DM21 (fixed means or means that can be moved by driving of driving means other than the first driving means DM21).

  When the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the first position shown in FIG. 192 (a) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM21 1), the first structure ST211 is configured to transmit light from the first light emitting means LM21 and light from the second light emitting means LM22. Both can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM21 and the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST211. It is possible.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the second position (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM21. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST211), the first structure ST211 does not transmit the light from the first light emission means LM21, and the second light emission means Only light from the LM 22 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST211, and the first light emitting means LM21. Can be visually recognized without passing through the first structure ST211.

  Further, the front (front side) of the first structure ST211 is a game area through which the game ball BL21 can pass, and the first structure ST211 is viewed from the front (front side) of the game table. It is arranged at a position where it may be overlapped with the game ball BL21 passing through the game area.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, And a first driving means DM21 (not shown), one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”), for example, as shown in FIG. The first light emitting means LM21 shown is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”). A second light emitting means LM22 shown in FIG. 192 (a) is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first”). For example, the first structure shown in FIG. The structure ST211) is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the position of the first structure is a position that may overlap a gaming ball (for example, the gaming ball BL21 shown in FIG. 192 (a)).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Moreover, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further varied depending on the position of the game ball, which can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 2-2>
FIG. 192 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 2-2. The game table according to the present example includes a first structure ST221, a first light emitting unit LM21, a second light emitting unit LM22, and a drivable first driving unit DM21 (not shown). Configured. The first light emitting means LM21 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM21, and the second light emitting means LM22 is the first driving means LM22. Means that are not moved by the driving of the means DM21 (fixed means or means that can be moved by driving of driving means other than the first driving means DM21).

  When the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the first position shown in FIG. 192 (b) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM21 In the case where the first structure ST221 is positioned at a position overlapping the first structure ST221, the first structure ST221 transmits light from the first light emitting means LM21 and light from the second light emitting means LM22. Both can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL positioned in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM21 and the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST221. It is possible.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the second position (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM21. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST221), the first structure ST221 transmits the second light emitting means without transmitting the light from the first light emitting means LM21. Only light from the LM 22 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST221, and the first light emitting means LM21. Can be visually recognized without passing through the first structure ST221.

  In addition, the front (front side) of the first structure ST221 is a game area through which the game ball BL21 can pass, and a ball rolling on which the game ball can roll is provided above the first structure ST221. A part (stage) ST221a is formed. When viewed from the front (front side) of the game table, the first structure ST221 is a game ball BL21 that passes through the game area, or a game ball BL22 that rolls on the ball rolling unit (stage) ST221a. It is placed at a position where it may overlap. The second light emitting means LM22 may be movable to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST221, or may emit light at this position.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first driving means DM21 (not shown), and one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as "first light emitting means"), for example, as shown in FIG. The first light emitting means LM21 shown is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”). A second light emitting means LM22) shown in FIG. 192 (b) is a means that does not move by the driving of the first driving means, and one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first”). For example, the first structure shown in FIG. The structure ST221) is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means. The position of the first structure is a position that may be overlapped with a game ball (for example, the game balls BL21 and BL22 shown in FIG. 192 (b)). .

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Moreover, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further varied depending on the position of the game ball, which can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 2-3>
FIG. 192 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 2-3. The game table according to this example is drivable with the first structure ST231 (in this example, a game board made of a transparent or translucent member), the first light emitting means LM21, and the second light emitting means LM22. First driving means DM21 (not shown). The first light emitting means LM21 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM21, and the second light emitting means LM22 is the first driving means LM22. Means that do not move by driving the means DM21 (fixed means or means that can be moved by driving means other than the first driving means DM11).

  When the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the first position shown in FIG. 192 (c) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM21 1), the first structure ST231 is configured to transmit the light from the first light emitting means LM21 and the light from the second light emitting means LM22. Both can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL positioned in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM21 and the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST231. It is possible.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when the first light emitting means LM21 sees the first light emitting means LM21 from the second position (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM21. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST231), the first structure ST231 does not transmit the light from the first light-emitting means LM21, and the second light-emitting means Only light from the LM 22 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the second light emitting means LM22 through the first structure ST231, and the first light emitting means LM21. Can be visually recognized without passing through the first structure ST231.

  Further, the front (front side) of the first structure ST231 is a game area through which the game ball BL21 can pass, and the game that passes through the game area in front of (first front side) of the first structure ST231. A plurality of ball flow downward direction changing portions (game nails) BP21 capable of changing the traveling direction of the ball BL21 are provided. The first structure ST231 is arranged at a position that may be overlapped with the game ball BL21 passing through the game area when viewed from the front (front side) of the game table. The second light emitting means LM22 may be movable to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST231, or may emit light at this position.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first driving means DM21 (not shown), one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as "first light emitting means"), for example, as shown in FIG. The first light emitting means LM21 shown is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”). A second light emitting means LM22 shown in FIG. 192 (c) is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first”). For example, the first structure shown in FIG. The structure ST231) is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means. The game machine is characterized in that the position of the first structure is a position that may be overlapped with a game ball (for example, a game ball BL21 shown in FIG. 192 (c)).

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Moreover, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further varied depending on the position of the game ball, which can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 2-4>
FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 2-4. The game table according to the present example is provided from the first light emitting means LM21 in front of the first light emitting means LM21 according to Example 2-1, which has been described with reference to FIG. A second structure ST212 (in this example, a lamp cover) that allows light to pass therethrough is provided, and the movable body MB11 is configured by the first light emitting means LM21 and the second structure ST212.

  The movable body MB11 (first light emitting means LM21, second structure ST212) can be moved in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by the first driving means DM21 (not shown). . In this example, the second structure ST212 is arranged in front of the first light emitting means LM21 (player side) and behind the first structure ST211. The structure may be a structure that transmits light from the first light emitting means according to the present invention (the same applies hereinafter). Further, when the first light emitting means LM21 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST211, it may stop (turn off) at least a part of light emission, or change from lighting to blinking, etc. The light emission mode may be changed.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 2-5>
FIG. 193 (b) schematically shows the structure and the light emitting means according to Example 2-5. The game table according to the present example is located from the first light emitting means LM21 in front of the first light emitting means LM21 according to Example 2-2 (player side) described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). A second structural body ST222 (in this example, a lamp cover) that allows light to pass through is disposed, and the movable body MB12 is configured by the first light emitting means LM21 and the second structural body ST222.

  The movable body MB12 (first light emitting means LM21, second structure ST222) can be moved in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by the first driving means DM21 (not shown). . The first light emitting means LM21 may be movable to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST221, or may emit light at this position. Further, when the first light emitting means LM21 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST221, it may stop (extinguish) at least a part of light emission, or change from lighting to blinking, etc. The light emission mode may be changed.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 2-6>
FIG. 193 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 2-6. The game table according to the present example is located from the first light emitting means LM21 in front of the first light emitting means LM21 according to Example 2-3 (player side) described with reference to FIG. 192 (c). A second structure ST232 (in this example, a lamp cover) that transmits light is disposed, and the movable body MB13 is configured by the first light emitting means LM21 and the second structure ST232.

  The movable body MB13 (first light emitting means LM21, second structure ST232) is movable in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by the first driving means DM21 (not shown). . The first light emitting means LM21 may be movable to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST231, or may emit light at this position. Further, when the first light emitting means LM21 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the first structure ST231, at least a part of the light emission may be stopped (turned off), or changed from lighting to blinking, etc. The light emission mode may be changed.

<Structure and Light Emitting Unit / Example 3-1>
FIG. 194 is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 3-1. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST31, a first light emitting means LM31, a second light emitting means LM32, and a driveable first driving means DM31 (not shown). The movable body MB31 is configured by the first structure ST31 and the first light emitting means LM31. This movable body MB31 (first structure ST31, first light emitting means LM31) can be moved in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM31 (not shown). The second light emitting means LM32 can be moved by driving of a driving means other than the first driving means DM31 (a fixed means or a driving means other than the first driving means DM31). Means).

  The movable body MB31 (first structure ST31, first light emitting means LM31) moves the second light emitting means LM32 from the first position (for example, the front (front side) of the game table) shown in FIG. When viewed, if all of the second light emitting means LM32 are located at a position where the second light emitting means LM32 is overlapped with the first structure ST31), the first structure ST31 is the first light emitting means LM31. Both the light from the second light emitting means LM32 and the light from the second light emitting means LM32 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM31 and the light from the second light emitting means LM32 through the first structure ST31. It is possible.

  Further, the movable body MB31 (first structure ST31, first light emitting means LM31) is moved from the third position shown in FIG. 194 (b) to the second light emitting means from the front (front side) of the game table, for example. When the LM32 is viewed, if a part of the second light emitting means LM32 is located at a position where it overlaps the first structure ST31), the first structure ST31 Both the light from the light emitting means LM31 and the light from the second light emitting means LM32 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL positioned in front of the game table (front side) transmits both the light from the first light emitting means LM31 and the partial light from the second light emitting means LM32 to the first structure ST31. It is possible to see through.

  On the other hand, the movable body MB31 (first structure ST31, first light emitting means LM31) is moved from the second position shown in FIG. 194 (c) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table to the second light emitting means. When the LM32 is viewed, if the second light emitting means LM32 is located at a position where the second light emitting means LM32 is not overlapped with the first structure ST31), the first structure ST31 is separated from the second light emitting means LM32. It is possible to transmit only the light from the first light emitting means LM31 without transmitting the light. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the first light emitting means LM31 through the first structure ST31, and the second light emitting means LM32. Can be visually recognized without going through the first structure ST31. Any one of the second structures (lamp covers) ST212, ST222, and ST232 according to Example 2-4 to Example 2-6 described with reference to FIG. 193 may be applied to this example. .

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, And a first driving means DM31 (not shown), one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”), for example, the first driving means DM31 shown in FIG. The light emitting means LM31 is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”), for example, in FIG. The second light emitting means LM32 shown is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”). For example, the first structure ST31 shown in FIG. Is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means, The structure is a game machine characterized by being a movable structure.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Moreover, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further varied depending on the position of the first structure, and the player's interest can be improved in some cases.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 4-1>
FIG. 195 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 4-1. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST41, a first light emitting means LM41, a second light emitting means LM42, and a driveable first driving means DM41 (not shown). Configured. The first light emitting means LM41 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game machine) by driving the first driving means DM41, and the second light emitting means LM42 is the first driving means LM42. Means that do not move by driving the means DM41 (fixed means or means that can be moved by driving means other than the first driving means DM41).

  When the first light emitting means LM41 sees the first light emitting means LM41 from the first position shown in FIG. 195 (a) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM41 In the case where the first structure ST41 is positioned at a position overlapping the first structure ST41, the first structure ST41 transmits the light from the first light emitting means LM41 and the light from the second light emitting means LM42. Both can be transmitted. However, in this example, since the second light emitting means LM42 emits light on the front side of the first structure ST41, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) is not allowed to move from the first light emitting means LM41. Can be viewed through the first structure ST41, and the light from the second light emitting means LM42 can be viewed without passing through the first structure ST41.

  On the other hand, although not shown, when the first light emitting means LM41 is viewed from the second position (for example, the first light emitting means LM41 from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM41. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST41), the first structure ST41 transmits the second light emitting means without transmitting the light from the first light emitting means LM41. Only light from the LM 42 can be transmitted. However, in this example, since the second light emitting means LM42 emits light on the front side of the first structure ST41, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) is not allowed to move from the first light emitting means LM41. It is possible to visually recognize both the light and the light from the second light emitting means LM42 without passing through the first structure ST41.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first drive means DM41 (not shown), one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as "first light emitting means"), for example, as shown in FIG. The first light emitting means LM41 shown is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”). A second light emitting means LM42 shown in FIG. 195 (a) is a means that does not move by the driving of the first driving means, and one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first”). For example, the first structure shown in FIG. The structure ST41) is a structure capable of transmitting the light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting the light from the second light emitting means. Any one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, only the second light emitting means LM42 shown in FIG. 195 (a)) is located on the front side of the first structure. It is a gaming machine characterized by being capable of emitting light.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, the light emitting means capable of emitting light on the front side of the first structure can further enhance the variety of light emission effects of the first structure, which can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 4-2>
FIG. 195 (b-1) to FIG. 195 (b-2) schematically show the structure and the light emitting means according to Example 4-2. The game table according to the present example is driven by the first structure ST41, the first light emitting means LM41, the second light emitting means LM422, and the first drive means DM41 (not shown) that can be driven. And a second driving means DM42 (not shown). The first light emitting means LM41 is a means that can be moved in the first direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM41, and the second light emitting means LM422 is the second light emitting means LM422. This means can be moved in the second direction (in this example, the front-rear direction of the game machine) by driving the driving means DM42.

  When the second light emitting means LM422 sees the second light emitting means LM422 from the first position shown in FIG. 195 (b-1) (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table, the second light emitting means LM422. When the LM 422 is positioned at a position where the LM 422 is overlapped with the first structure ST41, the first structure ST41 has the light from the first light emitting means LM41 and the light from the second light emitting means LM422. Both light can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL positioned in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM41 and the light from the second light emitting means LM422 through the first structure ST41. It is possible.

  On the other hand, when the second light emitting means LM422 sees the second light emitting means LM422 from the second position (for example, the front (front side) of the game table) shown in FIG. When the light emitting unit LM422 is positioned at a position where the light emitting unit LM422 is not overlapped with the first structure ST41, the first structure ST41 transmits the light from the second light emitting unit LM422 without transmitting the light. Only the light from the light emitting means LM41 can be transmitted. However, in this example, since the second light emitting means LM422 emits light on the front side of the first structure ST41, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) is separated from the first light emitting means LM41. Can be viewed through the first structure ST41, and the light from the second light emitting means LM422 can be viewed without passing through the first structure ST41.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first driving means DM41 (not shown), and one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”), for example, FIG. The first light emitting means LM41) shown in FIG. 4 is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”). For example, the second light emitting means LM422 shown in FIG. 195 (b-2) is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and is one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “the second light emitting means LM422”). , “First structure”, for example, FIG. The first structure ST41) shown in 2) is a structure that can transmit light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure transmits light from the second light emitting means. One of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means (for example, only the second light-emitting means LM422 shown in FIG. 195 (b-2)) is a possible structure. It is a gaming machine characterized by being a means capable of emitting light in front of one structure.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, the light emitting means capable of emitting light on the front side of the first structure can further enhance the variety of light emission effects of the first structure, which can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure and light-emitting means / Example 5-1>
FIG. 196 is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 5-1. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST51, a first light emitting means LM51, a second light emitting means LM52, and a driveable first driving means DM51 (not shown). Configured. The first light emitting means LM51 is driven in the predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by the driving of the first driving means DM51 in the predetermined distance (in this example, FIG. 196 (a) and FIG. The first position (initial position) shown in FIG. 196 and the second position shown in FIG. The light emitting unit LM52 is a unit that does not move by driving the first driving unit DM51 (a fixed unit or a unit that can be moved by driving a driving unit other than the first driving unit DM51).

  When the first light emitting means LM51 is located at the first position (initial position) shown in FIG. 196 (a) or FIG. 196 (c), the first structural body ST51 emits the first light emission. Both the light from the means LM51 and the light from the second light emitting means LM52 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM51 and the light from the second light emitting means LM52 through the first structure ST51. It is possible.

  On the other hand, when the first light emitting means LM51 is located at the second position (maximum movement position) shown in FIG. 196 (b), the first structure ST51 is separated from the first light emitting means LM51. It is possible to transmit only the light from the second light emitting means LM52 without transmitting the light. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can see the light from the second light emitting means LM52 through the first structure ST51, and the first light emitting means LM51. Can be visually recognized without passing through the first structure ST51 (or if the light from the first light emitting means LM51 is outside the range of view of the player PL, the first The light from the light emitting means LM51 is not visible).

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) includes a plurality of structures, a plurality of light emitting means, and a first drive means that can be driven (for example, A first driving means DM51 (not shown), and one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”), for example, the first driving means shown in FIG. The light emitting means LM51 is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”), for example, in FIG. The second light emitting means LM52 shown is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means, and is referred to as one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”). For example, the first structure ST51 shown in FIG. Is a structure capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means, and the first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means, The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light at the first position, and the first position is the initial position of the first light emitting means (for example, the first position in FIG. 196 (a) or FIG. This is a gaming table characterized by the fact that the light emitting means LM51 is stopped.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, since the first light emitting means can emit light even at the initial position, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further diversified and the player's interest can be improved.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 6>
FIG. 197 is a diagram schematically illustrating the structure and the light emitting unit according to Example 6. In FIG. 197, the left, right, up, and down arrows respectively indicate that the right side of the drawing is the right side of the gaming table when viewed from the front, the left side of the drawing is the left side of the gaming table when viewed from the front, and the upper side of the drawing is It is the upper surface side, and shows that the lower side of the page is the lower side (bottom side) of the game stand (the same applies to other drawings).

  The game stand according to this example is driven by the first structure ST61, the first light emitting means LM61, the second light emitting means LM62, and the driveable first drive means DM61 (not shown). The second drive unit DM62 (not shown) is included. The first light emitting means LM61 is a means that can move in the first direction (in this example, the front-view vertical direction) by driving the first driving means DM61 on the back side of the first structure ST61. Further, the second light emitting means LM52 is movable in the second direction (in this example, the oblique direction in the front view) by driving the second driving means DM62 on the back side of the first structure ST61. , A means capable of changing the posture (in this example, rotating 180 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) when viewed from the front).

  The first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62 are arranged in the first position shown in FIG. 197 (a) (for example, the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means from the front (front side) of the game table). When the LM62 is viewed, if the first light-emitting means LM61 and the second light-emitting means LM62 are located at a position where the first light-emitting means LM62 overlaps the first structure ST61), the first structure ST61 is Both the light from the first light emitting means LM61 and the light from the second light emitting means LM62 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player located in front of the game table (front side) visually recognizes both the light from the first light emitting means LM61 and the light from the second light emitting means LM62 through the first structure ST61. Is possible.

  On the other hand, the first light-emitting means LM61 and the second light-emitting means LM62 are connected to the second light-emitting means LM61 and the second light-emitting means LM62 from the second position shown in FIG. When the light emitting means LM62 is viewed, if the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62 are located at positions where they do not overlap the first structure ST61), the first structure ST61. Does not transmit light from the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62. Thereby, the player located in front of the game table (front side) can visually recognize the light from the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62 without passing through the first structure ST61. It is.

  The gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine shown in FIG. 190) is a gaming table including a plurality of structures and a plurality of light emitting means. One of the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”. For example, the first light emitting means LM61 shown in FIG. 197) is a means capable of the first operation (for example, linear movement). Yes, one of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”. For example, the second light emitting means LM62 shown in FIG. 197) can perform a second operation (for example, rotation). One of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”, for example, the first structure ST61 shown in FIG. 197) is supplied from the first light emitting means. A light transmissive structure, wherein the first structure is the second light emission A permeable structure light from stage, the second operation and the first operation is a gaming table characterized by a different operation, it.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, the light emission effect can be performed with the first structure by the light of the moving light emitting means and the light emitting means that does not move, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even when one of the light emitting means fails, the light emitting effect of the first structure can be performed by the other light emitting means, and it may be possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, since the first light emitting means can emit light even at the initial position, the light emission effects of the first structure can be further diversified and the player's interest can be improved.

  The first action and the second action may be the same action. For example, the first action and the second action are the same drop action (for example, the drop unfolding tool shown in FIG. 30). (Up and down movement of the unit 700). Further, when the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62 move to a position where they do not overlap with the first structure ST61, at least one of the first light emitting means LM61 and the second light emitting means LM62. At least a part of the light emission may be stopped (turned off), or the light emission mode may be changed such as changing from lighting to blinking.

<Structure and Light Emitting Unit / Example 7-1>
FIG. 198 (a) schematically shows the structure and the light emitting means according to Example 7-1. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST71, a first light emitting means LM71, a second light emitting means LM72, and a driveable first driving means DM71 (not shown). The first light emitting means LM71 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM71.

  In addition, the first part ST71a of the first structure ST71 is a part that can transmit the light from the first light emitting means LM71 and the light from the second light emitting means LM72. One second portion ST71b of the structure is a portion that can transmit light from the first light emitting means LM71 and light from the second light emitting means LM72.

  On the other hand, one third portion ST71c of the first structure ST71 is a portion that does not transmit light from the first light emitting means LM71 and light from the second light emitting means LM72, and has the first structure. One fourth part ST71d of the body is a part that does not transmit light from the first light emitting means LM71 and light from the second light emitting means LM72. Here, as "the part which does not transmit light" according to the present invention, a part where plating, painting, embossing, etc. are applied, a part where a seal is applied, and the like are applicable (the same applies to other examples).

  According to this example, the light from the first light emitting means LM71 and the light from the second light emitting means LM72 can interfere with each other, and the outline of the light emission effect can be clarified by the portion that does not transmit light. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Structure and light emitting means / Example 7-2>
FIG. 198 (b) schematically shows the structure and the light emitting means according to Example 7-2. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST72, a first light emitting means LM71, a second light emitting means LM72, and a driveable first driving means DM71 (not shown). The first light emitting means LM71 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM71.

  In addition, one first portion ST72a of the first structure ST72 is a portion that can transmit only light from the second light emitting means LM72, and one second portion ST1 of the first structure ST72a. The part ST72b is a part that can transmit only light from the first light emitting means LM71. On the other hand, one third portion ST72c of the first structure ST72 is a portion that does not transmit light from the first light emitting means LM71 and light from the second light emitting means LM72, and the first structure One fourth part ST72d of the body ST72 is a part that does not transmit light from the second light emitting means LM72, and one fifth part ST72e of the first structure ST72 is the first part ST72e. This is a portion through which light from the light emitting means LM71 does not pass.

  According to this example, the light from the first light-emitting means LM71 and the light from the second light-emitting means LM72 are prevented from interfering with each other, and the outline of the light emission effect is clarified by the portion that does not transmit light. In some cases, the production effect can be enhanced and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Structure and light emitting means / example with panel>
FIG. 199 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example in which the structure and the light emitting means are further provided with a panel. The game table according to this example includes a first structure ST81, a first light emitting means LM81, a second light emitting means LM82, a panel PN capable of transmitting light, and a first driving means DM81 that can be driven. The first light emitting means LM81 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by driving the first driving means DM81. In addition, the panel PN includes a third light emitting unit LM83 and a light direction changing unit that can change the traveling direction of the light from the third light emitting unit LM83 (in this example, a part that displays a pattern with a light emitting effect). ) PNa.

  When the first light emitting means LM81 is viewed from the first position shown in FIG. 199 (a) (for example, the first light emitting means LM81 from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM81 In the case where the first structure ST81 and the panel PN are positioned at a position overlapping the first structure ST81 and the panel PN, the first structure ST81 and the panel PN emit light from the first light emitting means LM81 and second light emission. Both light from the means LM82 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player located in front of the game table (front side) transmits both the light from the first light emitting means LM81 and the light from the second light emitting means LM82 through the first structure ST81 and the panel PN. It is possible to visually recognize the light from the third light emitting means LM83 through the light direction changing portion PNa of the panel PN.

  On the other hand, although not shown, when the first light emitting means LM81 sees the first light emitting means LM81 from the second position (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM81. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST81 or the panel PN), the first structure ST81 and the panel PN do not transmit light from the first light emitting means LM81. Only the light from the second light emitting means LM82 can be transmitted. Thereby, the player PL located in front of the game table (front side) can visually recognize the light from the second light emitting means LM82 through the first structure ST81 and the panel PN. The light from the light emitting means LM81 can be visually recognized only through the panel PN without passing through the first structure ST81 (or without passing through both the first structure ST81 and the panel PL). The light from the third light emitting means LM83 can be viewed through the light direction changing portion PNa of the panel PN irrespective of the first light emitting means LM81.

  In this example, the panel PN is disposed in front of the first structure ST81. However, the panel PN may be disposed between the first structure ST81 and the first light emitting unit LM81, or the first structure ST81. And the second light emitting means LM82, or may be arranged behind the first light emitting means LM81 and the second light emitting means LM82.

<Structure and light-emitting means / example with further movable body>
FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example in which a movable body is further provided in the structure and the light emitting means. The game table according to this example includes a movable body MB that does not transmit light instead of the panel PN that can transmit light illustrated in FIG. 199 (a), and the other configuration is illustrated in FIG. 199 (a). Same as the configuration. The movable body MB is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game table) by being driven by a second drive means DM82 (not shown).

  When the first light emitting means LM81 is viewed from the first position shown in FIG. 199 (b) (for example, the first light emitting means LM81 from the front (front side) of the game table, the first light emitting means LM81 In the case where the first structure ST81 is positioned at a position overlapping the first structure ST81 and the movable body MB), the first structure ST81 has the light from the first light emitting means LM81 and the second light emitting means LM82. However, the movable body MB does not pass the light from the first light emitting means LM81 and the light from the second light emitting means LM82. Thereby, the player located in front of the game table (front side) cannot visually recognize both the light from the first light emitting means LM81 and the light from the second light emitting means LM82.

  On the other hand, although not shown, when the first light emitting means LM81 sees the first light emitting means LM81 from the second position (for example, from the front (front side) of the game table), the first light emitting means LM81. Is positioned at a position that does not overlap the first structure ST81 or the movable body MB), the first structure ST81 transmits the light from the first light emitting means LM81 without transmitting light. Although only the light from the second light emitting means LM82 can be transmitted, since the movable body MB does not pass the light from the second light emitting means LM82, the player located in front of the game table (front side) The light from the second light emitting means LM82 cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the light from the first light emitting means LM81 passes through the first structure ST81 but cannot be visually recognized because it is blocked by the movable body MB, or is visually recognized without being blocked by the first structure ST81 and the movable body MB. It will either be possible.

  In this example, the movable body MB can be moved to a position that overlaps the first structure ST81. However, the movable body MB can be moved to a position that does not overlap the first structure ST81. Alternatively, a part of the movable body MB may be movable to a position where it does not overlap the first structure ST81 (or a position where it overlaps). Further, the movable body MB is disposed in front of the first structure ST81, but may be disposed between the first structure ST81 and the first light emitting means LM81, You may arrange | position between 2nd light emission means LM82, and may arrange | position behind 1st light emission means LM81 and 2nd light emission means LM82. Further, the movable body MB may include a display device (liquid crystal display device, projector, etc.).

  In addition, the movable body MB is configured by a member that does not transmit light, but a part or all of the movable body MB may be configured by a transparent member. In that case, only the light from the first light emitting unit LM81 is used. It may be transmissive, may be able to transmit only the light from the second light emitting means LM82, or may be able to transmit both lights.

<Structure and light emitting means / other examples of structure>
FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating another example of a structure. The game table according to this example has six structures (first structure ST91, second structure ST92, third structure ST93, fourth structure ST94, fifth structure ST95, sixth structure Structure ST96), two light emitting means (first light emitting means LM91, second light emitting means LM92) and drivable first driving means DM91 (not shown), The light emitting means LM91 is a means that can move in a predetermined direction (in this example, the vertical direction of the game machine) by driving the first driving means DM91.

  The sixth structure ST96 is made of an opaque member that does not transmit light, and other structures (first structure ST91, second structure ST92, third structure ST93, fourth structure). The body ST94 and the fifth structure ST95) are made of a transparent or translucent member that can transmit light. In this example, the sixth structure ST6 is arranged at the rearmost position, two light emitting means (first light emitting means LM91, second light emitting means LM92) are arranged in front of the sixth structure ST6, and further forward In addition, other structures excluding the sixth structure ST6 (first structure ST91, second structure ST92, third structure ST93, fourth structure ST94, and fifth structure ST95) Is arranged.

  More specifically, the first structure ST91 is disposed at a position where only the light from the first light-emitting means LM91 can be transmitted, and the second structure ST92 is light from the second light-emitting means LM92. The third structure ST93 is capable of transmitting both the light from the first light emitting means LM91 and the light from the second light emitting means LM92, and both lights are the same. It is arranged at a position where the transmission amount is reached. The fourth structure ST94 is capable of transmitting both the light from the first light emitting means LM91 and the light from the second light emitting means LM92, and is based on the amount of light transmitted from the first light emitting means LM91. Is arranged at a position where the amount of light transmitted from the second light emitting means LM92 increases, and the fifth structure ST95 transmits both the light from the first light emitting means LM91 and the light from the second light emitting means LM92. It is possible to transmit light and is arranged at a position where the amount of light transmitted from the first light emitting means LM91 is larger than the amount of light transmitted from the second light emitting means LM92.

  The first light emitting means LM91 may be a light emitting substrate having one or a plurality of LEDs (single color or full color), or may be a backlight of a liquid crystal display device. The second light emitting means may be a light emitting substrate having one or a plurality of LEDs (single color or full color) or a backlight of a liquid crystal display device. In addition, at least one of the first structure ST91, the second structure ST92, the third structure ST93, the fourth structure ST94, and the fifth structure ST95 has a sixth structure. It may be formed integrally with the body ST96, may be attached so as to be detachable from the sixth structure ST96, or may be attached to the sixth structure ST96 by fastening means or the like. Also good. The first structure ST91 may be composed of two or more parts (the same applies to the second to fifth structures). Further, the sixth structure ST96 may be one of a plurality of parts constituting a center accessory (for example, the center accessory 900 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29).

<Structure and light emitting means / other examples of light emitting means>
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing another example of the light emitting means. The relative positions of the structure ST, the first light emitting means LM1, and the second light emitting means LM2 are not limited to the above embodiments. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), the movable first light emitting means LM1 may be arranged behind the fixed second light emitting means LM2, or FIG. 201 (b). As shown, the movable first light emitting means LM1 may be disposed between the fixed second light emitting means LM2 and the structure ST.

  The first light emitting means LM1 and the second light emitting means LM2 may have the same size, the first light emitting means LM1 may be larger than the second light emitting means LM2, The second light emitting means LM2 may be larger than the first light emitting means LM1. Further, when the first light emitting means LM1 and the second light emitting means LM2 overlap in the front-rear direction, all of one light may be blocked by the other, or a part of one light may be blocked by the other. The other part of one light may not be blocked by the other. Further, the first light emitting means LM1 may emit light when the fluctuation effect, the notice effect, the pre-read notice effect, the jackpot effect, the demonstration effect, the error notification effect, the operation of the operation means by the player, or the like. Further, the second light emitting means LM2 may emit light when the fluctuation effect, the notice effect, the pre-read notice effect, the jackpot effect, the demo effect, the error notification effect, the operation of the operation means by the player, or the like. Further, the first light emitting means LM1 may emit light during a period overlapping with the light emitting period of the second light emitting means LM2. The second light emitting means LM2 may emit light during a period that overlaps the light emitting period of the first light emitting means LM1. Further, the emission color of the first light emitting means LM1 and the emission color of the second light emitting means LM2 may be the same or different. Further, the second light emitting means LM2 may not emit light during the light emission period of the first light emitting means LM1. Further, the first light emitting means LM1 may not emit light during the light emitting period of the second light emitting means LM2.

  Further, the front and rear positions of the first light emitting means LM1 and the second light emitting means LM2 may be changeable. For example, as shown in FIG. When a predetermined condition is satisfied when the vehicle is located behind the means LM2 (for example, when an operation by a predetermined operation means is accepted, when the slot machine is in a freeze state, or when the gaming state is shifted, In the case where the winning / not-winning result is a big win, or when a specific winning combination is won), as shown in FIG. 201 (b), the second light emitting means LM2 is positioned behind the first light emitting means LM1. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in a game machine including the first structure and the second structure that can transmit (or irradiate) light from the light emitting means, the front and rear positions of the first structure and the second structure are For example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first structure is located behind the second structure (for example, an operation by a predetermined operation unit is accepted) The second structure is the first structure when the slot machine is frozen, the game state is transitioned, the winning / failing result is a big win, the specific winning combination is won, etc.) You may comprise so that it may be located behind a body.

  Further, the position of the first light emitting means may be the rear or the front of the transmissive effect panel capable of emitting the pattern. Further, the position of the second light emitting means may be the rear or the front of the transmissive effect panel capable of emitting the pattern. Further, the position of the first structure may be behind the transmissive effect panel capable of emitting a pattern, or may be in front. Further, the second structure body may be configured to be able to transmit only the light of the first light emitting means from the rear. The first structure may be a non-movable structure or a movable structure. In addition, a transparent effect panel capable of emitting a pattern may be movable, may be configured integrally with the first light emitting unit, or may be configured separately. Further, a third light emitting means may be provided behind the first light emitting means at the initial position. The third light emitting means may be an LED or a backlight of a liquid crystal display device. One of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be overlapped with the other. The first structure may have a portion that does not transmit both the light from the first light emitting means and the light from the second light emitting means, and the portion is a plated portion on the surface. Alternatively, it may be a painted part on the surface.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

BL21, BL22 Game ball BP21 Game nail ST11, ST211, ST31, ST41 First structure LM11, LM21, LM31, LM41 First light emitting means LM12, LM22, LM32, LM42 Second light emitting means LM83 Third light emitting means PL player PN panel 100 pachinko machine 200 game board 200a5 game ball storage unit 200a10 second game ball storage unit 208 decorative symbol display device 244 stage 300 main control unit 400 first sub control unit 500 second sub control unit 700 falling deployment The accessory unit 712a The fourth structure 712b The first structure 712d The second structure 712c The third structure 730, 760 The drop unfolding accessory 731, 761, 821, 831 The first structure 732, 762 822,832 second structure 750 ascending feature Knit 800 launch won game unit 820, 830 roles was 823,833 third structure 850 V formation won game unit 900 Center won game

Claims (13)

Multiple structures;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A first drive means capable of driving;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “first light emitting means”) is a means that can be moved by driving the first driving means,
One of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “second light emitting means”) is a means that does not move by driving the first driving means,
One of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “first structure”) is a structure that can transmit light from the first light emitting unit,
The first structure is a structure capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means,
Either one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light on the front side of the first structure.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
One portion of the first structure (hereinafter referred to as “first portion”) is a portion that can transmit light from the first light emitting means,
One part of the first structure (hereinafter referred to as “second part”) is a part capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means,
The first part is a part capable of transmitting light from the second light emitting means,
The second part is a part capable of transmitting light from the first light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The second light emitting means is a non-movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The second light emitting means is a movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are configured separately.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
One of the plurality of structures (hereinafter referred to as “second structure”) is a structure through which light from the first light emitting unit passes.
The first structure and the second structure are configured separately.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 6, Comprising:
The second structure is a structure that can be moved by driving the first drive means.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The first structure is an immovable structure;
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
A second driving means capable of driving;
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
A display means,
The display means is a liquid crystal display device,
The liquid crystal display device is a device having the first light emitting means or the second light emitting means as a backlight.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The first structure is a structure capable of transmitting one of the light from the first light-emitting means and the light from the second light-emitting means from the front side of the first structure. ,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.